Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual
Huawei Genex Probe v18 User Manual
V3R18
User Guide
Issue 01
Date 2017-03-21
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Overview
This document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Assistant and
methods for analyzing the test data.
Product Version
The following table lists the product and version related to this guide.
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Change History
01 (2017-03-21)
This issue is the third version. Compared with issue 03 (2016-07-29) of V300R017C00, this
issue incorporates the changes listed in the following table.
Change Description
Contents
17 Customizing Functions...........................................................................................................217
17.1 Customizing KPIs.....................................................................................................................................................218
17.1.1 Creating Custom KPIs........................................................................................................................................... 218
17.1.2 Managing Defined KPIs........................................................................................................................................ 220
17.1.3 Example: Creating a Counting KPI....................................................................................................................... 221
17.1.4 Example: Creating a Calculation KPI................................................................................................................... 222
17.2 Customizing Events.................................................................................................................................................. 224
17.2.1 Creating Custom Events........................................................................................................................................ 224
17.2.2 Managing Events................................................................................................................................................... 226
17.3 Customizing Reports................................................................................................................................................ 226
17.3.1 Creating a Custom Report Template......................................................................................................................226
17.3.2 Modifying Existing Report Templates...................................................................................................................228
17.3.3 Creating an Office Report Template......................................................................................................................229
17.3.4 Example: Creating a Report Template...................................................................................................................230
17.4 Customizing Delays..................................................................................................................................................234
18 Typical Application.................................................................................................................242
18.1 IP Packet Detailed Decoding.................................................................................................................................... 243
18.1.1 HTTP..................................................................................................................................................................... 243
18.1.2 FTP........................................................................................................................................................................ 244
18.1.3 Video Streaming.................................................................................................................................................... 245
18.1.4 Email......................................................................................................................................................................246
18.2 Viewing the Delta Analysis for Network Optimization........................................................................................... 247
18.3 View Combine Analysis Results.............................................................................................................................. 249
18.4 Exporting Data Based on the Preset Filter Conditions............................................................................................. 252
19 Interface Reference..................................................................................................................256
19.1 Interface Description: Map Window........................................................................................................................ 260
19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Chart View Window.............................................................................. 265
19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in the Table View Window...............................................................................267
19.4 Interface Description: View Window Management................................................................................................. 269
19.5 Interface Description: Custom Report interface....................................................................................................... 270
19.6 Interface Description: KPI Editor Dialog Box......................................................................................................... 275
19.7 Parameters for Customizing Events......................................................................................................................... 278
19.8 Interface Description: Setting the Analysis Task Template......................................................................................279
19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control Properties..............................................................................................281
19.10 Parameters for Configuring Legends......................................................................................................................284
19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering Parameter Checking Failure.................................................. 288
19.12 Parameters for Setting GSM Theme Analysis Types............................................................................................. 289
19.13 Parameters for Setting the WCDMA Analysis Type..............................................................................................294
19.14 Parameters for Setting LTE Theme Analysis Types............................................................................................... 312
19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type.................................................................................................. 324
19.16 Parameters for Setting the TD-SCDMA Analysis Type.........................................................................................331
19.17 Parameters for Setting Display Properties of Sites.................................................................................................333
19.18 Parameters for Importing DT Logfiles................................................................................................................... 333
19.19 Parameters for Creating an Analysis Group........................................................................................................... 334
19.20 Interface Description: Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window............................................................... 335
19.21 Parameters for Viewing the Drilldown Analysis Result of a WCDMA Event.......................................................337
19.22 Parameters for Viewing the GSM Coverage Analysis Result................................................................................ 338
19.23 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Coverage Analysis Result......................................................................... 340
19.24 Parameters for Viewing the LTE Coverage Analysis Result..................................................................................342
19.25 Parameters for Viewing the TD-SCDMA Coverage Analysis Result.................................................................... 343
19.26 Parameters for Viewing the Missing Neighboring TD-SCDMA Cell Analysis Result..........................................345
19.27 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis Result................................................................. 346
19.28 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis Result.................................................... 347
19.29 Parameters for Viewing the WCDMA Missing Neighboring Analysis Result...................................................... 347
19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.................................................................................................................................. 349
19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates.............................................................................................................. 371
19.32 Parameters for Exporting CSV............................................................................................................................... 373
19.33 Parameters for Custom IEs..................................................................................................................................... 375
19.34 Parameters for Custom Events............................................................................................................................... 376
19.35 Parameters for Custom Delay.................................................................................................................................398
19.36 Parameters for Setting an Automatic Analysis Task.............................................................................................. 403
19.37 Parameters for Executing an Automatic Analysis Task......................................................................................... 403
19.38 Parameters for Measurement Information.............................................................................................................. 404
19.39 Parameters for Map Setting.................................................................................................................................... 407
19.40 Parameter Description: Indoor Report....................................................................................................................409
20 FAQs...........................................................................................................................................413
20.1 How Do I Uninstall the Main Program of the Assistant?.........................................................................................416
20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information...........................................................................................................416
20.3 How Do I Export Configuration Information...........................................................................................................418
20.4 What Should I Do to Troubleshoot the Failure of Starting the Assistant After the Microsoft Office Software Is
Uninstalled?...................................................................................................................................................................... 419
20.5 How to Prepare an Engineering Parameter File?......................................................................................................419
20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?....................................................................... 421
20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the Drilldown and Data View
Synchronization?.............................................................................................................................................................. 422
20.8 What Should I Do to Solve the Common Problems in Automatic Analysis Tasks?................................................ 423
20.9 What Should I Do When IEs Fail to Be Displayed on a Map in the Further Analysis Report in Quick Analysis
Mode?............................................................................................................................................................................... 424
20.10 How to Handle the Problem of Abnormal Breakdown of the Assistant When Moving a Legend on the Map?....425
20.11 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?................................................................................................425
20.12 What Should I Do When the Assistant Fails to Start the Google Earth?............................................................... 426
20.13 How to View Segmentation Points of DT Logs?....................................................................................................426
20.14 How Do I Resolve the Problem that an Error Message Is Displayed When an Excel Report Is Exported?.......... 427
20.15 How Do I Resolve the Problem that the Assistant Window Is Displayed in the Front but Other Windows Cannot
Be Displayed?...................................................................................................................................................................428
20.16 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Selected Data Points Cannot Be Highlighted When a Multi-selection Tool on
a Map Is Used to Select IEs?............................................................................................................................................ 428
20.17 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Assistant Icons Are Displayed as Garbled Characters?............................... 429
20.18 How Do I Solve the Compatibility Problem Between the Project of an Earlier Version and the Assistant?......... 429
20.19 What Do I Do If the Manually Calculated KPIs Are Slightly Different from Those Displayed on the Assistant?
.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 430
20.20 What Do I Do If the Volumes of Data Related to RF Modes Are Different Before and After Parsing?................430
20.21 What do I do if one time repeately appear when using Time Binning way to analyze data and display the IEs?. 431
20.22 If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be Displayed in the IE Tree......................431
21 Appendixes............................................................................................................................... 433
This section describes new functions of Assistant V300R018 compared with V300R017.
The Assistant is drive test (DT) logfiles Analysis software, which is used to analyze and
process test data of GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, and LTE networks. The Assistant
can also generate network test reports to meet network analysis requirements of customers.
The generated test reports effectively reflect the operation status of radio networks and
provide guidelines for network verification, network evaluation, network optimization, and
fault location. Therefore, the test reports help users learn about network performance, quickly
locate network problems, and improve work efficiency.
2.1 Overview of Assistant
This section describes the positioning and features of the Assistant. Analyzing and optimizing
network performance is an important means for operators to expand network capacity and
improve quality of service (QOS). The Assistant enables network planning engineers and
network optimization engineers to learn about network performance clearly, locate network
problems quickly, improve work efficiency, and reduce the operational expenditure (OPEX)
of operators.
2.2 Application Scenario of Assistant
This section describes the application scenario. The Assistant is applicable to multiple
scenarios such as project acceptance, routine optimization, integrated optimization, complaint
handling, and automatic import and analysis of DT data.
2.3 Basic Concept of Assistant
The basic concepts of the Assistant consist of the project, drive test (DT) logfile, signaling
message, and IE. To analyze DT data effectively by using the Assistant, you need to
familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.
2.4 Procedure of Assistant
This section describes two analysis modes and the operation procedure that provide guidelines
for data analysis.
2.5 Assistant Main Window
This section describes the main window of the Assistant, including the menu bar, toolbar,
navigator, operation interface, and required entries.
Positioning
The Assistant is drive test (DT) logfiles Analysis software, which is used to analyze and
process GSM, WCDMA,CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE drive test (DT) logfiles. It helps in
locating network problems and generating multiple analysis reports.
Features
l Powerful custom function
The Assistant supports the function of customizing events, KPIs, query criteria, and
reports to meet the actual service requirements and the requirements of extended
services.
l Theme-based problem location
The GENEX Assistant locates and analyzes the causes of the problems in DT logfiles
and lists the potential network problems related to radio parameters, neighboring cell
configuration, and radio frequency configuration.
The Assistant displays the problem cells and helps in analyzing problem cells according
to the following problems: over coverage, poor coverage, no serving cell dominance,
azimuth garbled, pilot pollution, downlink interference, and missing neighboring cells.
l Multiple formats of DT logfiles
The Assistant analyzes the data in multiple formats, such as the data in .gen format
collected by GENEX Probe, data in .phu format collected by GENEX PHU, data
in .fmt(.fm5, .fm7, .fm8) format collected by Ericsson TEMS, .dlf and .RSCMD. In
addition, the Assistant can convert DT data to .csv format. This facilitates the problem
location by using other software.
DT logfile A DT logfile is the record of the data collected during a DT. The test
data is stored in one or multiple files during a DT. These files are
called DT logfiles.
Analysis group The Assistant groups DT logfiles according to the service type, test
area, and test duration, and analyzes DT logfiles and generates reports
by analysis group.
Event Based on the rules for defining events, the Assistant determines events
according to the air interface messages or Layer 3 signaling messages.
This helps in locating radio network problems. Call drop and call
setup can be considered as events.
Signaling message The signaling messages provided by the Assistant refer to the air
interface messages.
The air interface messages are messages measured by terminals,
including Layer 3 signaling messages.
IE The information element (IE) refers to the basic unit that records the
measurement information in DT logfiles.
Map A map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo
map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map
window on the Assistant. The map information includes basic
information, test route, events, and engineering parameters of the test
area.
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved
in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst
(GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for
saving the layer sequence, layer label information, and legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer. The raster map
supported by the Assistant is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png
format.
Layer The layer is a series of data displayed in the map view window. The
layer consists of the following types:
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells and is
composed of a series of themes.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer
contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains
multiple engineering parameters.
Legend Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends. Both
system legends and custom legends contain two types of legends:
l Ranged Legend
This type is used for the parameters with consecutive values, such
as RSCP and Ec/Io. The parameter values can be segmented, and
each value range is provided with a different display symbol.
Generally, gradient colors are used to indicate different value
ranges, thus helping you view the distribution of parameter values.
l Individual Legend
This type is used for parameters with discrete values, such as
events. Each parameter value is provided with a different display
symbol.
Label The labels indicates the objects in various layers of maps in text form.
The objects include field names of engineering parameters in cell
layers, IE values and numbers in IE layers.
Theme analysis The theme analysis enables the Assistant to extract experience from
network planning engineers, and quickly analyze and locate customer-
concerned network problems.
The theme analysis enables the Assistant to analyze problem cells,
display problem cells on a map, and synchronously display radio
parameter information related to the problem cells, thus helping you
locate network problems.
Figure 2-3 shows the procedure for analyzing data on the Assistant,Table 2-2 describes the
detailed information of Figure 2-3.
2 Menu bar Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see
Menu Bar.
4 Progress bar Displays the name of the log file that is being imported.
When you browse IE information, perform drill-down
analysis, perform correlated theme analysis tasks, or
switch between windows, the name of the file where the
KPIs belong is displayed.
Menu Bar
The menu bar of the Assistant shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu
bar are arranged according to the main functions of the Assistant to facilitate your operations.
Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Assistant and the corresponding functions.
System Setting Modifies and view the current analysis task template of
a project, including the settings of KPIs, IEs, themes,
filtering, binning, display properties of engineering
parameter conditions.
Setting Project Setting Modifies and view the current analysis task
template of a project, including the settings
of KPIs, IEs, themes, filtering, binning,
display properties of engineering parameter
conditions.
VoLTE Theme Theme Setting Sets the VoLTE Theme analysis type. For
details about the parameters, see 19.15
Parameters for Setting the VoLTE
Analysis Type.
Toolbar
Table 2-11 shows the toolbar. You can click the corresponding icon to navigate to related
interface or perform related operations.
- Replay speed.
- Pause.
Navigator
The navigator, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for the
main operations of the system. The navigator consists of two tab pages.
l Project: displays the data and analysis groups of the current project.
You can right-click the nodes in the navigator to manage and view data and all the
analysis groups.
l Legend: displays the predefined and customized legends of the system.
For details about customized legends, see Configuring Legends.
Operation Interface
The operation interface is used to display data analysis results. It consists of seven tab pages:
l Overview: displays KPI analysis results, IE view window, and event view window.
l Drill Down: displays the analysis results after data is drilled down.
l GSM Theme: displays GSM theme analysis results.
l WCDMA Theme(UE): displays the WCDMA theme analysis results of UE DT data.
This section describes how to install the main program of the Assistant. To complete the
installation of the Assistant, you need only to run the installation program and then perform
operations as prompted by the installation wizard.t.
3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Assistant
This section describes the preparations for installing the Assistant. Before installing the
Assistant, you must check that the installation requirements are met. The installation
requirements are as follows: The software package of the Assistant is available. The
configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation.
3.2 Checking the Integrity of the Software
To prevent the software package from being maliciously tampered with or damaged during
transfer, which may jeopardize the carrier network security, you must verify the integrity of
software packages after downloading them. Software packages can be deployed only after
their integrity is verified.
3.3 Installing the Assistant Main Program
This section describes how to install the main program of the Assistant, You can install the
main program of the Assistant by using an automatic installation wizard. The wizard guides
you through the installation of the Assistant.
Hardware requirements
Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.
NOTE
The memory required for running the Assistant is closely related to the PC operating system and amount of
data to be analyzed. The required hard disk space is directly related to the amount of data to be analyzed.
Software requirements
Table 3-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.
Installation l Download the software The user must have an account Manda
package of the installation package in http://support.huawei.com. In tory
GENEX from http:// addition, the user is authorized
Assistant support.huawei.com. to download the GENEX
V300R018 The directory for Assistant V300R018 software
downloading the patch installation package or the user
package is Support > has purchased the GENEX
Product Support > Assistant V300R018.
Wireless Network >
FDD > LTE FDD
RAN > LTE FDD
Services > GENEX
Assistant > GENEX
Assistant V300R018.
l Installation DVD of
the GENEX Assistant
V300R018.
Prerequisites
Prepare the Assistant installation program and check whether the PC meets the hardware
requirements for installing the Assistant. For details, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing
the Assistant.
Procedure
Step 1 Download the patch package, corresponding OpenPGP digital signature file, and OpenPGP
Signature Verification Guide.pdf from http://support.huawei.com.
l The directory for downloading the patch package is Support > Product Support >
Globle Service > Telecom Network Rollout & Integration Service > Mobile Network
Rollout & Integration Service > GENEX Assistant > GENEX Assistant V300R018.
l Click on the right of the software package name and download the corresponding
OpenPGP digital signature file.
l Click Digital Signature Authentication Mode in the upper right part of the software
package list to download OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide.pdf.
Step 2 For details about how to verify the software using the OpenPGP digital signature file, see
OpenPGP Signature Verification Guide.pdf.
NOTE
To prevent the software package from being maliciously tampered with or damaged during transfer,
which may jeopardize the carrier network security, you must verify the integrity of software packages
after downloading them. Software packages can be deployed only after their integrity is verified.
l If the verification is passed, install the software package. For detailed operations, see 3.3
Installing the Assistant Main Program.
l If the verification fails, the software package has security risks. In such case, download
the software package again.
----End
Prerequisites
The main program of the Assistant is available, and the PC meets the conditions of installing
the main program of the Assistant. For details, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the
Assistant.
Context
l Before installing the main program of the Assistant, you are advised to close all the
running programs to ensure the successful installation of main Assistant program.
l Before installing the main program of the Assistant, you are advised to log in to the PC
as user administrator. Otherwise, installing the main program of the Assistant may fail
or the main program of the Assistant cannot be used.
l Before installing the Assistant software, you are advised not to change the name of
vcredist_x86_vs2008.exe in the installation package. otherwise, the installation of the
Assistant software may fail.
Procedure
Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Assistant V300R018 installation package.
If... Then...
Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license
agreement.
Step 10 After the installation, a dialog box is displayed, prompting you to install the Framework 4.6.1,
clickOK.
If DT data in .trp format needs to be analyzed, you are required to click Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.6.1 to download and install the software after the Assistant installation.
NOTE
The Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 is provided by Microsoft. The Assistant uses this software for
TEMS data analysis and does not provide the Framework package and subsequent maintenance and
upgrade services. Microsoft is liable for providing Framework security and risk information.
You are advised to restart the PC after the installation so that the font used by the Assistant is
displayed normally.
Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Suite > Assistant V300R018 > GENEX Assistant
3.18 to check that the information about the Assistant is listed.
If... Then...
The information about the The main program of the Assistant is successfully
Assistant is listed installed.
The information about the Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the main
Assistant is not listed program of the Assistant is installed successfully.
----End
This section describes how to apply for a license and related precautions. When the Assistant
is restarted, whether a license is available is checked. If it is unavailable, the Assistant cannot
be used (only the replay function can be used). A license is used to limit the application scope
of the Assistant.
NOTE
Login China Domain and Login License Server are used only in versions for internal delivery.
If you use iAccess to access the China domain network of Huawei and domain authentication fails for
multiple times, use another method, such as Login License Server.
1. Choose Tool > Update Assistant License. The Update Assistant License window is
displayed.
2. Select Login License Server. In the displayed Login License Server dialog box, set
related parameters. For detailed parameters, see Table 4-2.
Offline Update
If the PC cannot connect to the China domain network of Huawei or the Internet, apply for a
license in offline mode.
Procedures for Applying for a License
1. Choose Tool > View ESN on the menu bar to obtain the ESN.
Send the obtained ESN to Huawei technical support to obtain a new license file.
2. Choose Tool > Update license > License File. The Open window is displayed.
3. Select a license file.
4. Click OK. A message is displayed, indicating that a license is successfully updated.
Click License Info to view detailed license information.
The startup of the Assistant provides entries to the operations of the Assistant. After the
Assistant starts, data analysis can be performed.
Prerequisites
l The main program of the Assistant is already installed. For details, see 3.3 Installing the
Assistant Main Program.
l The license file is obtained..
Procedure
Step 1 Double-click the shortcut icon of the Assistant on the desktop to start the Assistant.
Alternatively, you can start the Assistant through the Start menu or by double-clicking
Software installation path/Bin/Assistant.exe.
Step 2 If License Info window occurs, hints Failed to get license file or license file is not correct,
you must click Update to obtain the License so that you can use the relevant functions
authorized by the license. For details about how to obtain the license, see 4 License
Application Management.
Alternatively, you can send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new
license. Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days.
Step 3 After the Assistant starts successfully, you can create a project or open the created project for
subsequent operations.
----End
Context
NOTE
If you use the software of the new version to open or reallocate a project created using the old version,
the analysis result may be different between old and new versions.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project > New Project on the menu bar, or click . The New Project dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.
NOTICE
A project cannot be named as CON, AUX, PRN, NUL, COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4,
COM5, COM6, COM7, COM8, COM9, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, LPT4, LPT5, LPT6, LPT7,
LPT8, or LPT9.
If a dialog box occurs and hints Failed to create project. Please install NDP461-DevPack-
KB3105179-ENU.exe, Click Microsoft .NET Framework 4.6.1 to download and install the software
and retry.
2. On the KPI and IE tab pages, select KPIs and IEs to be analyzed.
For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
3. On the Report tab page, select the properties of report.
For details, see 6.2.2 Setting Report Attributes.
NOTE
Reporting for TEMS data is not supported.
4. On the Theme tab page, select themes to be analyzed.
For details, see 6.2.3 Setting the Theme Analysis Type.
NOTE
After a project is created, you can modify the properties of the selected analysis task template, but
cannot perform the following operations: adding a new template; deleting or renaming the selected
analysis task template.
----End
Context
One project contains one KPI template and one IE template. All analysis groups of a project
analyze DT data according to the template.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you want to modify the KPI template and IE template after a project is created, choose Project >
Project Setting. After the Project Setting dialog box is displayed, proceed to the following steps:
Step 2 Click the KPI tab and set the KPI template, as shown in Figure 6-3.
After the data is analyzed, the KPI is marked in red if the KPI value exceeds the alarm threshold.
3. If the quick analysis mode is used, select whether to perform event judgment during KPI
analysis in the Event Analysis Mode area.
– Normal: indicates that event judgment is performed again during analysis.
The default value is Normal.
– Not Rejudge: indicates that the event judgment is not performed again during
analysis. The event information recorded by Probe can be obtained directly.
Step 3 Click the IE tab and set the IE template, as shown in Figure 6-4.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
To modify the Report attributes for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the
displayed Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.
Step 2 Click the Report tab page and set the following parameters:
l In the report template selection area, set the report template. For detailed operations,
seeTable 19-8.
NOTE
Only the selected report templates can be exported. Unselected report templates are not displayed
on the GUI or cannot be selected for export.
l Report composite show: indicates whether to combine multiple reports into one Word
reports.
l Map legend composite show: indicates whether to display both the legend and map on
one picture.
l Grid show: indicates whether to display the grid.
l Indoor min PCI: indicates the minimum PCI in indoor reports.
l Indoor max PCI: indicates the maximum PCI in indoor reports.
l RSRP Difference Value: indicates the difference between RSRP values.
l CPU Counter: indicates the number of CPUs. The maximum value is the value obtained
by subtracting 1 from the number of CPUs of a PC.
l Power-off Protection: when Power-off Protection is set to Yes, power-off protection is
enabled and data is saved in real time during analysis. However, performance is affected.
----End
Context
The Assistant provides various theme analysis types, as shown in Table 6-1.
GSM Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.
WCDMA Pilot pollution Pilot pollution results in little difference between the
pilot RSCP of the serving cell and the RSCP of other cells. As
pollution a result, cell reselection and handovers occur frequently.
analysis After the DT data is analyzed, the Assistant can
automatically calculate the RSCP mapping between the
serving cell and a neighboring cell so that you can check
whether signals are garbled in the area where the DT point
is located.
WCDMA Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.
Wrong coverage Wrong coverage can result in the difference between the
coverage area of a cell and the planned coverage area,
greatly affecting network performance. The Assistant can
identify cells where wrong coverage occur frequently for
reference by network planning engineers.
WCDMA Throughput The Assistant can identify cells where throughput occur
Throughp frequently for reference by network planning engineers.
ut analysis
WCDMA Abnormal Event The Assistant can identify cells where abnormal event
Abnormal occur frequently for reference by network planning
Event engineers.
analysis
WCDMA PSC The Assistant can identify cells where PSC interference
PSC Optimization occur frequently for reference by network planning
Optimizat engineers.
ion
Azimuth Garbled The reverse connection of the antenna feeder makes the
coverage area of a cell different from the planned
coverage area and therefore greatly degrades network
performance. The Assistant can locate the reverse
connection of the antenna feeder quickly based on the
azimuth.
LTE Poor coverage A poor-coverage cell usually has a large number of low-
Coverage level signal points. The Assistant can identify poor-
analysis coverage cells for reference by network planning
engineers.
Wrong coverage The wrong coverage makes the coverage area of a cell
different from the planned coverage area and therefore
greatly degrades network performance. The Assistant can
identify cells where wrong coverage occur frequently for
reference by network planning engineers.
Handover delay Handover delay occur in a cell, and the network quality is
poor. The Assistant can identify cells where handover
delay occur frequently for reference by network planning
engineers.
LTE Abnormal Event The Assistant can identify cells where abnormal event
Abnormal occur frequently for reference by network planning
Event engineers.
analysis
LTE Throughput The Assistant can identify cells where throughput occur
Throughp frequently for reference by network planning engineers.
ut analysis
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you want to modify the theme analysis type after a project is created, choose Project > Project
Setting to open the Project Setting dialog box.
Step 2 Click the Theme tab to set the theme analysis type.
NOTE
You can select the themes as required so that analysis efficiency is improved.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
To modify the theme analysis type for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the
displayed Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.
Step 2 Click the CDF Statistics tab and set the CDF percentage.
The default value is 5.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports following methods for filtering DT logfiles:
l By IE
Filtering data by the IE values recorded in DT logfiles.
l By time
Filtering data by the time information recorded in DT logfiles.
l By combination of IE and time
Filtering data by both the IE values and time information recorded in DT logfiles.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you want to modify the site display properties for a created project, choose Project > Project Setting.
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed.
b. Click OK.
The system adds the preset filtering condition to the IE filter condition area.
NOTICE
After the setting is complete, the system analyzes only the data meeting the preset
filtering condition.
1. Click Add on the right side of the Time filter condition area. The Add Time Condition
Item dialog box is displayed.
Set the start time in Start Time and set the end time in End Time.
NOTE
----End
Context
The Assistant uses different binning modes to retrieve DT data for meeting different
requirements of customers.
The binning mode affects the theme analysis and the display of IEs on a map, in a chart, or in
an Excel worksheet, but does not affect the analysis of messages and events.
Data binning can be performed by distance, time, or grid.
l By time
Data is collected by time. That is, all DT points within a certain period are combined into
a DT point.
l By distance
Data is collected by distance. That is, all DT points within a certain distance are
combined into a DT point.
l By grid
The longitude and latitude divide the surface area of the Earth into multiple grids. The
data of all DT points within a certain grid is collected as a DT point.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The Template Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you want to set binning after a project is created, choose Project > Project Setting to open the
Project Setting dialog box.
Step 3 Select a binning mode from the Binning Type drop-down list.
By distance 1. Select Distance Binning from the Binning Type drop-down list.
2. Set the value of Binning Param Distance(m).
The value of Binning Param Distance(m) ranges from 0.01 to 1,000. The
default value is 5 and the unit is meter (m).
By time 1. Select Time Binning from the Binning Type drop-down list.
2. Set the value of Binning Param Time Span(s).
The value of Binning Param Time Span(s) ranges from 0.01 to 1,000.
The default value is 1 and the unit is meter (m).
By grid 1. Select Binning Type from the Location Binning drop-down list.
2. Set Binning Param Height(m) and Binning Param Width(m).
The value of Binning Param Height(m) ranges from 2 to 1000. The
default value is 5 and the unit is meter (m). The value of Binning Param
Width(m) ranges from 2 to 1000. The default value is 5 and the unit is
meter (m).
----End
Example
The following examples show the presentation of data on a map in case of different binning
modes are used.
l Figure 6-6 shows the presentation of data a map in case that no binning mode is used.
l Figure 6-7 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the distance binning is
used and Binning Param Distance(m) is set to 20.
l Figure 6-8 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the time binning is used
and Binning Param Time Span(s) is set to 10.
l Figure 6-9 shows the presentation of data on a map in case that the grid binning is used
with a grid of 10 m x 10 m.
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The Template Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
If you want to modify the site display properties for a created project, choose Project > Project Setting.
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed.
Step 3 In the Layer List area, select a layer where the site display properties are to be set.
The site properties will automatically apply to site layers on maps in the Map window and report maps.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Click Manage in the New Project dialog box. The System Setting dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
To modify Other attributes for an existing project, choose Project > Project Setting. In the displayed
Project Setting dialog box, perform subsequent operations.
Step 2 Click the Others tab sheet and set the CPU and power-off protection. For details about the
parameters, see Table 6-2.
----End
NOTE
If you use NB-IoT terminal to execute the test, please refer to the LTE engineering parameters.
l For details about GSM engineering parameters, see Descriptions of GSM Engineering
Parameters.
l For details about WCDMA engineering parameters, see Descriptions of WCDMA
Engineering Parameters.
l For details about CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters.
l For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.
l For details about TD-SCDMA engineering parameters, see TD-SCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Cell Name No Indicates the name of a cell. Data type: character string.
Electrical Indicates the electric down Data type: float; value range:
Downtilt No tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.
Antenna
Gain No Indicates the antenna gain. Data type: float.
Site Type No Indicates the site type. Data type: character string.
BTS Type No Indicates the type of a BTS. Data type: character string.
Project
Phase No Indicates the project phase. Data type: character string.
H-
Beamwidt Indicates the horizontal
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.
V-
Beamwidt Indicates the vertical
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.
Cell Type No Indicates the type of a cell. Data type: character string.
Cell Name No Indicates the name of a cell. Data type: character string.
Indicates the total down tilt Data type: float; value range:
DownTilt No (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.
Electrical Indicates the electric down Data type: float; value range:
Downtilt No tilt (degree). -90.0 to 90.0.
Antenna
Gain No Indicates the antenna gain. Data type: float.
H-
Beamwidt Indicates the horizontal
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.
V-
Beamwidt Indicates the vertical
h No beamwidth. Data type: float.
Feeder
Type No Indicates the feeder type. Data type: character string.
Feeder
Length(D Indicates the downlink feeder
L) No length. Data type: float.
Cell Type No Indicates the cell type. Data type: character string.
Local Cell Yes Indicates the internal code of Data type: integer. Range: 0 to
ID a cell for differentiating the 255.
cell from other cells under
the same eNodeB.
Latitude Yes Indicates the Latitude Data type: double. Range: -90.0
(degree). to 90.0.
Cell Name Yes Indicates the name of a Cell. Data type: character string.
DownTilt No Indicates the total down tilt Data type: float. Range: -90.0 to
(degree). 90.0.
Electrical No Indicates the electric down Data type: float. Range: -90.0 to
Downtilt tilt (degree). 90.0.
Prerequisites
l A GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA, or LTE engineering parameter file in .xls
or .csv format is available. The Assistant supports the engineering parameter files in .xls
or .csv format.
Engineering parameter files to be imported into the Assistant must be in certain formats.
You can choose Project > Export Template on the main menu to export a specific
engineering parameter template provided by the Assistant.
l A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Context
Matching and checking are two important processes for importing engineering parameters to
the Assistant.
l Engineering parameters are classified into mandatory fields and optional fields.
Matching is to match mandatory fields and optional fields in engineering parameters
with those in the system.
– The mandatory fields must be matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering
parameters cannot be imported.
– The optional fields are matched according to the actual situation. If some optional
fields are not matched, the system displays a message to show the unmatched fields
during the import of engineering parameters. This does not affect the import of
engineering parameters.
l Checking GSM engineering parameters is to check the validity of GSM engineering
parameters, CGI repeatability, and repeatability of LAI and CI.
l Checking WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE engineering parameters is to check
the validity of engineering parameters.
The procedure for importing GSM engineering parameters is the same as the procedure for
importing WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE engineering parameters. The following
description takes the procedure for importing GSM engineering parameters as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Import an engineering parameter file.
1. On the Project tab page, choose Site > GSM.
2. Right-click GSM and choose View Engineering Parameter from the shortcut menu.
The GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
On the Project tab page, click GSM and choose View Engineering Parameter. The GSM
Engineering Parameter window dialog box is displayed.
When multiple engineering parameter files are imported, they are combined into one file
if you select Combine. If you do not select Combine, the existing engineering parameter
file will be replaced by the newly imported file. The duplicate engineering parameter
files with the same mandatory fields will be deleted after the engineering parameter files
are combined.
If the firstly imported engineering parameter file is incorrect, close the file and then
import other engineering parameter files.
If you import the engineering parameters again, you cannot view the theme analysis
results. In this case, clear the analysis results and perform the parameter analysis again to
view the theme analysis results.
8. Click OK.
If... Then...
If... Then...
Step 3 Optional: Manually match the mandatory fields and optional fields in the file with the
mandatory fields and optional fields in the system.
If You Need To... Then...
Match a mandatory Select the mandatory field to be matched, right-click it, and then
field choose Please Match > Required Field > Matched Field Name
from the shortcut menu.
Match an optional Select the optional field to be matched, right-click it, and then
field choose Please Match > Optional Field > Matched Field Name
from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
Each field can be matched only once. When you attempt to match a field repeatedly, the system displays
a message, indicating that the field is matched successfully.
You must select a field to be matched, right-click it, and then choose Cancel Matched Field from the
shortcut menu. After that, clear the matched field.
If... Then...
The check on all the field The system displays a message, prompting you to confirm
values is successful the imported result.
The check on the values of The system considers this error as an alarm, records it in
optional fields fails the report, and then prompts you to view the alarm
information.
The check on the values of The system considers this error as a failure, records it in
mandatory fields fails the report, and then prompts you to view the failure
information.
The check on the values of The system prompts you to view the alarm information.
both the mandatory fields and
optional fields fails
The field length exceeds 100 The system prompts you to continue the import of
characters engineering parameters.
l If you select to continue the import of engineering
parameters, the Assistant imports the field contents of
the field length within 100 characters.
l If you cancel the data import, the Assistant cancels the
import of engineering parameters.
The report contains the specific location where the check fails and the corresponding error
level. For details, see 19.11 Parameters in a Report Generated for Engineering Parameter
Checking Failure.
NOTE
l In the GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box, the rows of the values indicating that the check
fails are marked by pink. For the mandatory fields, the values indicating that the check fails are
marked by dark red. For the optional fields, the values that the check fails are marked by yellow.
l The data in rows that are marked by dark red and yellow cannot be imported into the system.
Step 5 Optional: Modify the values that the check fails in the engineering parameter file by referring
to Descriptions of GSM Engineering Parameters and 19.11 Parameters in a Report
Generated for Engineering Parameter Checking Failure. After modification, perform Step
1 through Step 4 to import engineering parameters again.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l Query engineering parameters.
On the Project tab page, choose Site > GSM, right-click GSM, and then choose View
Engineering Parameter from the shortcut menu. The information about the imported
engineering parameters is displayed.
l Export engineering parameters.
In the GSM Engineering Parameter dialog box, click to export the engineering
parameters in .xls format for future use.
NOTE
The cell radius calculated on the basis of engineering parameters ranges from 0 to 5,000 (m).
If the calculated cell radius is greater than 5,000 m, the system considers this cell radius as 5,000
m. If the calculated cell radius is less than 100 m, the system considers this cell radius as 100 m.
Prerequisites
l The neighboring cell data in .csv files or MML scripts is available.
The neighboring cell data in .csv files must contain four fields. You can obtain the
neighboring cell data template from the following path: Software installation path
\SystemConfig\Neighboring Cell Template.csv.
l The engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
Context
The neighboring cell data files in .csv format must contain the following fields: RNC ID, Cell
ID, NRNC ID, and NCell ID.
Procedure
Step 1
Import GSM/ For example, to import WCDMA data, perform the following
WCDMA/TD-SCDMA operations:
neighboring cell data l On the Project tab page, choose Site > WCDMA. Right-
click WCDMA and choose Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration from the shortcut menu. The Open dialog
box is displayed.
l Choose GSM/CDMA/WCDMA/TD-SCDMA > Load
Neighbor Cell Configuration from the menu. The Open
dialog box is displayed.
Import LTE neighboring l On the Project tab page, choose Site > LTE. Right-click
cell data LTE and choose Load Neighbor Cell Configuration >
By CellID and PCI or Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration > By eNodeBID and localCellID from
the shortcut menu. The Open dialog box is displayed.
l Choose LTE > Load Neighbor Cell Configuration > By
CellID and PCI or LTE > Load Neighbor Cell
Configuration > By eNodeBID and localCellID from
the menu. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select the neighboring cell data file, and then click Open.
You can select multiple neighboring cell data files at a time.
If the neighboring cell data file in .csv format is inconsistent with the format specified in the
template or the MML command does not contain the neighboring cell data, the Assistant
considers the neighboring cell data file as an invalid file.
Step 5 Select whether to view the detailed results in the Information window.
After the neighboring cell data is imported, you are prompted to view the detailed results. The
detailed results contain the invalid file names, and error information and error type of the
import failures, therefore helping you analyze error cause.
NOTE
The data that is successfully imported can be saved in the Assistant. The data that fails to be imported
cannot be saved in the Assistant.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
l View neighboring cell data
c. Optional: Right-click on the map and choose Neighbor Cell from the shortcut
menu. The neighboring cell data is not displayed. To view neighboring cell data,
right-click on the map then choose Neighbor Cell from the shortcut menu again.
l Add neighboring cell data
The selected cell is displayed in red and the neighboring cells of the selected cell
are displayed in blue.
c. Right-click a highlighted cell, and choose Delete Configured NB Cell from the
shortcut menu.
NOTE
The deleted neighboring cells are still listed in the exported neighboring cell data table and
identified with Delete.
l Export the neighboring cell data from the Assistant
a. On the Project tab page, select Site > WCDMA.
b. Right-click Export Neighbor Cell Table. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
Export the required neighboring cell data as a .csv file.
Map
A map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map.
The map information is displayed in the map window on the Assistant. The map information
includes basic information, test route, events, and engineering parameters of the test area.
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved in a file. The files
supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special
type of workspace used for saving the layer sequence, layer label information, and
legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Assistant is
in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png format.
Layer
A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map
layers and indicator layers.
l A map consists of multiple map layers.
l An indicator layer consists of a series of themes, such as IEs and cells.
A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and
water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters. Figure 6-13
shows the cell layer on the map.
WCDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.
WCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
Second UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.
WCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
Third UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported WCDMA engineering parameter file.
LTE Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported LTE engineering parameter file.
LTE Cells Second Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported LTE engineering parameter file.
LTE Cells Third Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported LTE engineering parameter file.
TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
First UARFCN imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.
TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
Second UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.
TD-SCDMA Cells Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
Third UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported TD-SCDMA engineering parameter file.
CDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have most same ARFCNs in the
UARFCN imported CDMA engineering parameter file.
CDMA Cells Second Indicates the layer of the cells that have second-most same
UARFCN ARFCNs in the imported CDMA engineering parameter file.
Parameter Description
CDMA Cells First Indicates the layer of the cells that have the same ARFCNs except
UARFCN the cells having the most and second-most same ARFCNs in the
imported CDMA engineering parameter file.
Label
Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For
example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the
IEs on an IE layer.
Legend
Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends. Both system legends and
custom legends contain two types of legends:
l Ranged Legend
This type is used for the parameters with consecutive values, such as RSCP and Ec/Io.
The parameter values can be segmented, and each value range is provided with a
different display symbol. Generally, gradient colors are used to indicate different value
ranges, helping you view the distribution of parameter values.
l Individual Legend
This type is used for parameters with discrete values. Each parameter value is provided
with a different display symbol.
Legends can be set in the following methods:
l Automatic segmentation
This method is used to set the parameters with specific value ranges or number of values,
such as the RSCP and handover events. This method can specify a precise value range.
l No segmentation
This method is used to set the parameters with unknown value ranges, such as
scrambling codes. The method can set the shape properties of legends only. The system
automatically sets different symbols and colors for different parameter values.
l Custom segmentation
This method is used to set Ranged legends only. You can set the value range, number of
segments, and color.
Prerequisites
l A MapInfo map file or a raster map file is available.
l A project is already created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.
Context
l MapInfo map
A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, each of which is saved in a file.
The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is
a special type of workspace used for saving the layer sequence, layer label information,
and legend.
l Raster map
An entire map can be considered as a layer.
The raster map supported by the Assistant is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .jpeg, .gif or .png format.
NOTICE
The projection coordinate used by the Assistant is Longitude/Latitude[WGS 84]\p4326 and
this projection coordinate is used by measuring counters and cell-sectors. Therefore, set the
projection coordinate to Longitude/Latitude[WGS 84]\p4326 when converting a picture into
an electronic map. Otherwise, the counter measurement result and the mutual-aid cell sector
may be inconsistent with the electronic map.
The Assistant supports the import of indoor maps, such as the indoor raster maps. The
imported map file can be displayed on the all opened map windows of the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project tab page.
Step 2 right-click and choose Map > Display On Map, The Map dialog box is displayed.
l Import an outdoor map.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the map is imported, you can view the map information in the map window and set
relevant parameters. For details, see Setting Layer Display Properties.
Prerequisites
l A project is already created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details about how to import engineering
parameters, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering Parameters.
NOTE
If the hint Custom dataset error. Could not find a CLSID for the type of custom dataset
specified. Check that the custom dataset is properly registered occurs, please uninstall the
Assistant and choose the Complete type to install the Assistant.
Procedure
l Search for cells.
Alternatively, you can click the button on the toolbar to select the cell radius
and then double-click the radius to open the Modify Cell Radius dialog box.
NOTE
If the cell radius is not displayed on the map, click on the toolbar to configure an IE
layer for the Assistant. After that, select the cell radius to be displayed on the map window,
and then click OK.
b. Enter the modified cell radius in Current Radius area.
c. Click OK.
l Enable the multi-label function.
a. In the Map Layers window, choose Data Layers > Engineering Layer >
WCDMA to select a layer.
b. Right-click Engineering Layer and choose Edit Cell Label from the shortcut
menu. The Label Edit dialog box is displayed.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can right-click on a map and choose Edit Cell Label from the shortcut
menu.
c. In the Label Edit area, set Field1 and Field2 to select the combination of cell fields
to be viewed.
d. In the Visibility area, set Min Zoom, Max Zoom, and Maximum Labels, as
shown in Figure 6-14.
e. Click OK.
NOTE
Assume that the zoom value of the map is 3048.32, the preset label is displayed within the range
from 0.01 to 20000, and the number of cells displayed within the current range is less than 500
(maximum number of cells displayed on the map). Then, the labels of Longitude + Latitude are
displayed on the map. If the number of labels to be displayed on the map exceeds Maximum
Labels, the labels of this layer are not displayed on the map.
l Check cell connection lines.
– Check the connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell.
Figure 6-15 Connection line between a DT point and its corresponding cell
NOTE
Generally, serving cells are connected by a green solid line and neighboring cells are
connected by a black dotted line.
– Check the connection lines between multiple DT points and their corresponding
cells.
n During the analysis of LTE UE or GSM UE data, a corresponding cell is a
serving cell that corresponds to the selected DT point.
n During the analysis of WCDMA UE data, a corresponding cell is an active cell
that corresponds to the selected DT point.
n During the analysis of Scanner data, a corresponding cell is the one that
receives the strongest signals among the cells that correspond to the selected
DT point.
For details about the parameters of Map Setting, see 19.39 Parameters for Map
Setting.
l Set the map layer projection.
Right-click the map and choose Projection from the shortcut menu. The Choose
projection dialog box is displayed. Select a projection type from the Category drop-
down list and select a project mode from the Category Members drop-down list.
----End
Prerequisites
l If the map layer display properties need to be set, the map file must be imported. For
details, see 6.4.2 Importing a Map.
l If the engineering parameter layer display properties need to be set, the engineering
parameter file must be imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l If the IE layer display properties need to be set, the conditions of displaying IEs on the
map must be met. For details, see 13.1.2 Viewing the Analysis Results in the IE View
Windows.
Context
The map window consists of a series of layers. The layer is categorized into the following
types:
l Map layer: consists of geographic data such as data about the roads, streets, and streams.
l Indicator layer: consists of cell layer, cell radius layer, IE layer, base station layer, single-
cell coverage layer, and theme layer.
NOTE
l If the cell radius layer needs to be displayed, either of the following conditions must be met:
(1) After engineering parameters are imported, the Cell Radius parameter is matched
successfully. (2) After engineering parameters are imported, the cell radius needs to be
calculated.
l The base station layer is displayed on the map only when engineering parameters are imported
and grouped into analysis groups.
l The single-cell coverage layer is displayed on the map only when you view the single-cell
coverage.
l The theme layer is displayed on the map only when the theme analysis results of a cell are
drilled down.
You are advised to set the map window to display necessary layers such as layers related to
the main streets and engineering parameters.
Procedure
l Set the layer properties of the display object.
a. In the Map window, right-click on the map and choose Layer Control from the
shortcut menu.
b. In the Layer Control dialog box, select the map layer to be displayed in the Layers
area, as show in Figure 6-17.
For details about parameters, see 19.9 Parameters for Configuring Layer Control
Properties.
c. In the Layer Control dialog box, set the map layer properties in the Properties
area.
d. Click OK.
l Set the layer offset.
The required layers are Select or deselect the check box of the layer to display
displayed in the Map or hide the layer.
Layers area in the Map
window
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the setting, you can save the layer data.
l To save the data of the map layers to a .gst file, do as follows:
d. Click OK. The data of the map layer and parameter layer is saved in the
corresponding .tab files.
Configuring Legends
To configure the legends, you need to configure the legend properties, including the legend
color, legend shape, and legend font. Therefore, the IEs and events are displayed in different
legends. If you do not configure any legend, the system displays the IEs and events in default
legends.
Context
Each project can be configured with only a set of legends. By configuring legends, you can
achieve the following purposes on the map:
l Different IEs are displayed as different layers.
l In different value ranges, the same IE is displayed in different colors and sizes.
l Different events are displayed as different icons.
Legends are classified into system legends and custom legends.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Legend tab.
Step 2 Configure the information about a new legend, in the navigation tree of the Legend tab page,
select the object node (IE or event) to be configured. Figure 6-18 shows the structure of the
navigation tree.
Configure event Set legend properties in the Symbol Setting dialog box. For
legends details, see Symbol Setting Dialog Box.
Configure IE legends Set legend properties in the Ranged Legend Property dialog
box. For details, see Description of Parameters in the
Ranged Legend Property Window.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The system displays the IEs and events on a map according to the configured legends. You
can modify legends of indicators or load legends in the Map Layers window.
l To modify the legends of an indicator, do as follows:
a. Right-click an indicator and choose Modify Legend from the shortcut menu.
b. In the displayed Ranged Legend Property dialog box, set the legends of the
indicator.
For details about parameters, see Description of Parameters in the Ranged
Legend Property Window.
l To load legends, do as follows:
a. Right-click an indicator and choose Load Legend from the shortcut menu.
b. In the displayed Legend dialog box, select an indicator that is configured with
legends.
c. Click OK.
The legends of the selected indicator are applied to the current indicator.
Prerequisites
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Context
Currently, the colors of the following IEs can be synchronized with the serving cell color:
l SC For 1st Best in Active Set(WCDMA UE)
l SC For 1st Best Service Cell(WCDMA Scanner)
l GSM Serving Cell(GSM UE)
l GSM Serving BCCH(GSM UE)
l LTE Serving_PCI(LTE UE)
l LTE Serving_EARFCN(LTE UE)
l LTE CellId(LTE UE)
Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, search for the IE name to be viewed in .
NOTE
The selected IE must be one of IEs that support the color synchronization on the Assistant.
Step 4 Select the IE whose color needs to be synchronized with the serving cell color in the
Synchronize Cell Color dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19 Synchronizing the serving cell color with the IE color
Step 5 Optional: On the Map Layers navigator tree, select Data Layers > Engineering Layer >
Cell Color to disable the function of synchronizing the IE color with the serving cell color.
----End
Context
The Assistant can import the following types of DT log files:
l .gen DT log files collected by GENEX Probe V100R005, V200R002, V200R003 and
V300R005.
l .phu DT log files collected by GENEX PHU V100R002 and V100R003
l DT log files collected by TEMS 5.0, 7.0, or 8.0. The extension of the TEMS filenames
is .fmt or .fm*, where * indicates the version of the TEMS. For example, the DT log files
of TEMS 5.0 are in .fm5 format.
Both the GENEX Probe and the GENEX PHU can slice DT log files automatically.
During the import of DT log files, the Assistant can automatically determine whether the
imported DT log files are sliced, and combine these automatically sliced DT log files
into one log file for analysis.
l DT logs in DLF, RSCMD and RSCMD.asc format.
Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click LogFile and choose Logfile Manager from the shortcut
menu. The Logfile Manager window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.
Step 2 Optional: In the Logfile Manager dialog box, select Auto Combine to combine multiple
sliced DT log files into one file.
After Auto Combine is selected, the sliced DT log files displayed in the Logfile Manager
dialog box are automatically organized by service types.
NOTE
The system can automatically combine DT log files that are imported recently with DT log files that are
not analyzed or analyzed unsuccessfully into one log file, but cannot automatically combine DT log files
that are imported recently with DT log files that are analyzed successfully into one log file.
In the Logfile Manager dialog box, click Delete to delete one or multiple selected DT log
files.
NOTE
You can delete only the DT log files that are not analyzed or analyzed unsuccessfully.
You can delete the DT log files after clearing the analysis results.
Step 3 Optional: If the indoor maps are contained in the imported data, click Indoor Logfile Edit.
In the displayed Indoor Logfile Edit dialog box, set the default latitude and longitude about
the indoor data and click OK.
After the setting and the data analysis, the indoor and outdoor data can be displayed jointly.
Step 4 Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The imported DT log files are displayed under the Logfile node in the project navigation tree.
To view the test plan of the imported log file, right-click this log file and choose Properties
from the shortcut menu. To view the test plan of the terminal, right-click the terminal recorded
in the log file and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
Alternatively, click the Analysis Group node to analyze log files by analysis group. For
details about analysis groups, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
By creating an analysis group, you can manage different types of test terminals in each DT
logfile according to the service type, test area, and test duration. The functions of analyzing
KPIs and generating reports are all dependent on analysis groups. If analysis groups are not
created on the Assistant, DT data cannot be analyzed.
Prerequisites
You have created an analysis task. For details, see 6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually .
Context
You can create multiple analysis groups for a project. In each analysis group, multiple
analysis report templates can be set, and multiple analysis reports or an integrated one can be
generated. An integrated analysis report can also be generated for multiple analysis groups.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Project > Analysis Group Manager on the menu bar. The Analysis Group
Manager window is displayed. as shown in Figure 7-1.
Alternatively, on the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group, and choose Analysis
group Manager from the shortcut menu.
Step 2 Create an analysis group.
Automatically create an Click Auto. Alternatively, right-click the Project tab, and
analysis group by test choose Analysis group > Auto Grouping By MS ID
terminal from the shortcut menu. Then, perform Step 5.
l To modify an analysis group, you need to select an analysis group to be modified and
click Edit.
Alternatively, right-click the Project tab and choose Analysis Group Name > Edit
Analysis Group from the shortcut menu; or double-click Analysis Group Name, and
modify the attributes of the analysis group.
l To delete an analysis group, you need to select an analysis group to be deleted and click
Delete.
NOTE
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After analysis groups are created, imported DT logfiles are displayed by analysis group under
the Analysis Group node in the project navigation tree.
This section describes how to execute an analysis task. After setting an analysis task and
importing DT data, you need to execute an analysis task. After the analysis is complete, you
can view analysis results and analysis reports.
Prerequisites
l You have created an analysis task. For details, see 6 Creating Analysis Tasks
Manually.
l An analysis group is created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Context
After DT log files are imported, the DT data is not imported to the database of the Assistant.
The Assistant imports the DT data to the database, analyzes it, and generates analysis reports
only after the analysis task is executed.
You can execute an analysis task for a specific analysis group. Alternatively, you can execute
an analysis task for all the analysis groups in a project at a time.
Procedure
Step 1 Select the object of an analysis task to be executed.
Execute an analysis 1. On the Project tab page, Choose Analysis Group > Analysis
task for a specific Name.
analysis group 2. Right-click this analysis group and choose Run Analysis
from the shortcut menu.
3. Click OK.
4. Perform Step 2 through Step 4.
Step 2 When the system displays the Originator-Target RelationSetting dialog box, set the calling
and called parties for the PTT call test.
NOTE
If the system finds that the first data file in the analysis group contains PTT tests and there are more than
two MSs, the Originator-Target Relation Setting dialog box is displayed.
After the calling and called parties are set for the PTT call test, the system collects statistics on and
displays Initial/In-call Media Latency.
The automatic analysis function does not collect statistics on Initial/In-call Media Latency.
1. Select a group of MSs used for PTT call test in the Originator-Target Relation Setting
dialog box and click Add.
Repeat Step 2.1 to set multiple groups of MSs. One MS can be set only once. For
example, if MS1 calls MS2 and MS3 calls MS4 during the PTT test, add MS1-MS2 and
MS3-MS4.
2. Click OK. The setting is complete.
After the analysis is complete, the Initial/In-call Media Latency window displays
parameters related to the Media latency. You can view by choosing UE > Delay >
WCDMA > PTT > Initial/In-call Media Latency from the IE navigation tree in the left
pane.
Step 3 View the task execution status.
l In the Run Analysis dialog box, the information about the DT log files to be imported to
the database is displayed, including the file name, file size, import progress, and import
status.
l Import all files progress displays the import progress of all the log files.
l The After Analysis window displays the desired result after analysis.
– Select View Analysis Result to view KPI analysis results.
– Select View Theme Result to view theme analysis results.
You can select View Theme Result only when the theme analysis type is set and
the cell radius is calculated.
NOTE
During the execution of an analysis task, if you want to cancel the analysis of DT log files, select the DT
log files in the Run Analysis dialog box, and then click Cancel.
During the execution of an analysis task, you can import new log files or delete the log files that have
not been analyzed yet. You can import a file whose name has existed before to replace the imported files
that have not been analyzed, but you are not allowed to replace the analyzed file.
During the execution of an analysis task, if a power failure occurs or the Assistant is powered off, the
analyzed data is still available. You can create an IE tree using the analyzed data.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After all the log files are imported to the database, you can view and drill down KPI analysis
results and theme analysis results, and view analysis reports.
Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to RxLev during the setting of the IE template. For
details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l The analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l GSM engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Procedure
View the RxLev coverage of the Right-click the cells and choose GSM RxLev for Cell
GSM serving cell and Coverage from the shortcut menu. Figure 9-1 shows
neighboring cells the coverage of each of the cells.
View the RxLev coverage of the Right-click the serving cell and choose GSM RxLev
GSM serving cell for ServingCell Coverage from the shortcut menu.
Figure 9-2 shows the coverage of the serving cell.
Figure 9-1 Single cell coverage — GSM serving cell and neighboring cells
NOTE
The query results are automatically displayed under the Data Layers > SingleCellCoverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
GSM RxLev for Cell_(13+3501) Coverage_All Log in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2 is the name of the
coverage layer of a GSM cell. 13 indicates the location area code (LAC) of the cell. 3501 indicates the
cell identity (CI). All Log indicates the name of the analysis group that includes the queried coverage
indicator.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.
Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each cell occupies a
row, and each parameter occupies a column. The fixed
parameters are listed in the first six columns, and the
parameters listed in the other columns vary according to the
theme analysis type. The analysis results are identified in
different colors. For example, the analysis results are
identified in red if the over coverage rate of a cell exceeds
the alarm threshold.
NOTE
Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart, as
shown in Figure 9-3.
l The Over Coverage tab page displays the details about
the over coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Over Coverage Tab Page.
l The Poor Coverage tab page displays the details about
the poor coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Poor Coverage Tab Page.
l The Azimuth Garbled tab page displays the details
about the azimuth garbled analysis. For details about
parameters, see Azimuth Garbled Tab Page.
l The No Serving Cell Dominance tab page displays the
details about the no serving cell dominance analysis. For
details about parameters, see No Serving Cell
Dominance Tab Page.
Window Description
GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates that the DT point is not in the cell.
l Orange indicates that the DT point has the greatest
interference with the serving cell because the cell of the
DT point for which the no serving cell dominance
analysis results are drilled down is the neighboring cell
with the smallest level difference from the serving cell.
GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.
GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.
GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the GSM Theme Point Information window, each line
indicates a problem area and each column indicates the
parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.
GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.
GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.
Window Description
GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.
GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the GSM Theme Point Information window, each line
indicates a problem area and each column indicates the
parameters related to the problem area.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.
GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.
GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.
Window Description
GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the GSM theme analysis type by referring to Setting the GSM Theme Analysis Type.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose GSM Theme Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the GSM Theme tab page
containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
GSM Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
NOTE
You can double-click the cell analysis results in a row in the GSM
Theme Point Information window to drill down the cell analysis
results.
GSM Serving + Neighbor Displays the indicators of the current GSM serving cell and
Cell window neighboring cells.
GSM Radio Parameters Displays the indicators of the radio air interface for the
window current GSM serving cell.
GSM Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map.
l Red indicates an abnormal DT point.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to the Ec/Io and RSCP during the setting of the IE
template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Context
The UE-based single cell coverage analysis and the scanner-based single cell coverage
analysis are conducted with the same method. This section describes the UE-based single cell
coverage analysis.
Procedure
View the Ec/Io coverage of a Choose WCDMA Ec/Io for cell Coverage >
WCDMA cell that is a serving cell WCDMA UE Ec/Io Max for Cell Coverage in
Activeset.
Figure 10-1 shows the coverage of the serving cell.
View the Ec/Io coverage of a Choose WCDMA Ec/Io for cell Coverage >
WCDMA cell that is a serving cell WCDMA UE Ec/Io Max for Cell Coverage.
and a neighboring cell
Figure 10-2 shows the coverage of each of the
cells.
Figure 10-1 RxLev coverage of a WCDMA cell that is a serving cell and a neighboring cell
Figure 10-2 RxLev coverage of a WCDMA cell that is a serving cell and a neighboring cell
NOTE
The query results are automatically displayed under the the Data Layers > Single Cell Coverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
WCDMA UE Ec/Io for Cell(201+31) Coverage_All Login Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2 is the name
of the coverage layer of a WCDMA cell. 201 indicates the cell identity (CI), 31 indicates the RNC ID of
the cell, and All Log indicates the name of the analysis group to be viewed.
----End
Context
You can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information only by cell. In addition, you
can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information about only one cell at a time.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Coverage
Theme Analysis Type.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-3 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-1 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates one
cell and each column indicates the parameters related to the
cell. The first three columns are fixed parameters. The
parameters in other columns are configured coverage-
related parameters, for example, the over-coverage rate. The
File List column lists the DT logfile list, that is, the list of
DT logfiles related to the serving cell of the DT point.The
analysis results are identified in different colors. For
example, if the over-coverage rate of the cell exceeds the
alarm threshold, the analysis result is displayed in red.
NOTE
Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
l The No Serving Cell Dominance tab page displays the
details about the no serving cell dominance analysis. For
details about parameters, see No Serving Cell
Dominance Tab Page.
l The Over Coverage tab page displays the details about
the over coverage analysis. For details about parameters,
see Over Coverage Tab Page.
Window Description
WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates the DT points that do not belong to the
cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the pilot pollution analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs
and scanners. The methods for viewing the pilot pollution analysis results of DT logfiles
collected by UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
pilot pollution analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Pilot
Pollution Theme Analysis Type.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-4 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-2 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates one
cell and each column indicates a parameter related to the
cell. The PP All column lists the number of DT points with
pilot pollution problems in the cell. The File List column
lists the DT logfile list, that is, the list of DT logfiles related
to the serving cell of the DT point.
NOTE
Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
View the statistical information about DT points with pilot
pollution on the displayed Pilot Pollution tab page. For
details about parameters, see 19.27 Parameters for
Viewing the WCDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis Result.
Window Description
WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l The hand-like icon in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window indicates a DT point with pilot pollution.
Choose Legend > System Legend > WCDMA > PP
Pilot on the Legend tab page. View the map according
to the legends of the DT points with pilot pollution.
l Click the DT point with pilot pollution in the WCDMA
Theme(UE) Map window. Then, the cells that cause
pilot pollution to the DT point are marked in black
circles.
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, In the two area boxes in the lower part of the
Theme Detail window, you can view the latitude and
longitude information about the selected DT point and
the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set
through solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set
through broken lines.
l Under the Theme Layer node on the Map Layers tab
page, select WCDMA Pilot Pollution and WCDMA
Pilot Pollution Cell. Then, you can clearly view the
results of pilot pollution analysis.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the downlink interference analysis on DT logfiles collected by both
UEs and scanners. The methods for viewing the downlink interference analysis result of DT
logfiles collected by both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes
how to view the downlink interference analysis result of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an
example.
The Assistant determines whether to perform the downlink interference analysis according to
the RSCP and Ec/Io. The Assistant performs downlink interference analysis on the DT points
with high RSCP value (RSCP value > RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value <
Ec/Io threshold).
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA downlink interference analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA
Downlink Interference Theme Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-5 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-3 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates a
cell, and each column indicates a parameter related to the
cell. The DL Interference(%) column lists the percentage
of downlink interference DT points in each cell. The File
List column lists the DT logfiles. Only the DT logfiles
related to the cells that serve the DT points are listed.
NOTE
Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
On the DL Interference tab page, view the statistical result
of downlink interference DT points. For details about the
parameters, see 19.28 Parameters for Viewing the
WCDMA Downlink Interference Analysis Result.
WCDMA Theme(UE) Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
Map window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red DT points have downlink interference.
l Green DT points are normal.
l Orange DT points have low receive level and high
speech quality.
l Purple DT points have low receive quality and low
receive level.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant determines whether measurement cells are neighboring cells according to the
RSCP and Ec/Io values of measurement cells. After that, the Assistant compares the data of
these determined neighboring cells with the imported neighboring cell data, if the imported
neighboring cell data does not contain the data of any determined neighboring cells, the
determined neighboring cell is considered as a missing neighboring cell.
The Assistant can perform the WCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis for the DT logfiles
collected by scanners.
Procedure
Step 1 Importing neighboring cell data by referring to Importing Neighboring Cell Data.
Step 2 Set the WCDMA missing neighboring cell Analysis type by referring to Setting the
WCDMA Missing Neighboring Cell Theme Analysis Type.
Step 3 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 4 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page containing the
theme analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-6 describes the WCDMA
Theme(Scanner) tab page. Table 10-4 describes the windows on the WCDMA
Theme(Scanner) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > Scanner Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Theme Result View Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, each row indicates a
cell and each column indicates a parameter related to this
cell. For details about parameters, see Theme Result
Review window.
NOTE
Window Description
Theme Detail window Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a chart.
On the Missing Neighbor Cell tab page, view the missing
neighboring cell information. For details about the
parameters, see Missing Neighbor Cell tab page.
WCDMA Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
According to the colors of DT points, you can determine the
size of missing neighboring cell area and focus on the area
where a large number of missing neighboring cells are
located
l Blue cells on a map indicate the configured intra-
frequency neighboring cells of the serving cell.
l Green cells on a map indicate the configured inter-
frequency neighboring cells of the serving cell.
l Orange cells indicate the missing neighboring cells of
the serving cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Coverage theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Coverage
Theme Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-7 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-5 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Handover theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-8 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-6 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
The Interference theme supports GEN and ROMES data parsing.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-9 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-7 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT log files collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-10 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-8 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT log files collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT log files collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the WCDMA coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the WCDMA Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import WCDMA engineering parameters by referring to Importing WCDMA Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Run the analysis task by referring to Running an Analysis Task.
After the analysis task is executed, the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 10-11 describes the WCDMA Theme(UE)
tab page. Table 10-9 describes the windows on the WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose WCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the
WCDMA Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
WCDMA UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the WCDMA UE Theme Map
window, see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the WCDMA Theme(UE) Map window,
In the two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail
window, you can view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have selected the IEs related to the RSRP, RSRQ, and RSSI during the setting of the
IE template, such as Serving RSRP, Serving RSRQ, and Serving RSSI. For details, see
6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l The analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Context
The UE-based single cell coverage analysis and the scanner-based single cell coverage
analysis are conducted with the same method. This section describes the UE-based single cell
coverage analysis.
Procedure
View the RSRP coverage of Right-click the serving cell and choose LTE RSRP for
the serving cell Cell Coverage > LTE UE RSRP for Serving Cell
Coverage from the shortcut menu. Figure 11-1 shows the
coverage of the serving cell.
View the RSRP coverage of Right-click the cells and choose LTE RSRP for Cell
the serving cell and Coverage > LTE UE RSRP for Cell Coverage from the
neighboring cells shortcut menu. Figure 11-2 shows the coverage of each of
the cells.
Figure 11-2 Single cell coverage — LTE serving cell and neighboring cells
NOTE
The query results are automatically displayed under the Data Layers > SingleCellCoverage Layer
node on the Map Layers tab page.
LTE RSRP for Cell_(6+0) Coverage -All Log in Figure 11-1 and Figure 11-2 is the name of the
coverage layer of an LTE cell. 6 indicates the cell identity (CI). 0 indicates the physical cell identifier
(PCI). All Log indicates the name of the analysis group that includes the queried coverage indicator.
----End
Context
The LTE coverage analysis involves two themes: RF over coverage, RF no serving cell
dominance and azimuth garbled.
An over-coverage cell must be a primary serving cell and its signals cover the areas to be
planned.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the KTE Coverage Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.
After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-3 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-1 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red indicates the DT points with over coverage or no
serving cell dominance.
l Green indicates a normal DT point.
l Gray indicates the DT points that do not belong to the
cell.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The LTE coverage theme analysis includes: analysis of weak coverage, no serving cell
dominance, overshoot coverage, wrong coverage, overlay, limited uplink quality and Inter Nb
Analysis.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Coverage Theme
Analysis Type.
After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-4 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-2 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style, Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
The parameters for the frequent handover theme are used as
an example. The parameters for the delayed handover theme
are the similar.
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Problem Type: problem type. Value: OverCoverage.
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l OverCoverage Cell Name: name of an overshooting cell
l OverCoverage TAC: TAC of an overshooting cell
l OverCoverage PCI: PCI of an overshooting cell
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– Adjust the downtilt or azimuth, or reduce the pilot
power.
– You are advised to increase the downtilt of the
primary serving cell by 2 degrees.
– You are advised to increase the downtilt of the cell
which is the farthest from a UE by 2 degrees.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.
LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.
Window Description
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The LTE HO theme analysis includes frequency handovers and handover delay.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE HO Theme Analysis
Type.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.
After the analysis task is executed, the LTE Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme
analysis results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-5 describes the LTE Theme(UE) tab
page. Table 11-3 describes the windows on the LTE Theme(UE) tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
The parameters for the frequent handover theme are used as
an example. The parameters for the delayed handover theme
are the similar.
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Problem Type: problem type. Value: Continually
Handover.
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Number of Frequent Handovers: number of frequent
handovers
l Primary Serving Cell Name: name of a primary serving
cell
l Primary Serving Cell PCI: PCI of a primary serving cell
l Ping-Pong Handover Occurred: whether ping-pong
handovers occur. Value: YES or NO.
l Ping-Pong Handover Cells: ping-pong handover cell
l Possible Cause: possible cause. Value: Continually
Handover.
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– You are advised to check handover parameter
settings.
– Increase the power of the cell with the longest
coverage duration on a road.
– Increase the downtilt of the cell which is the farthest
from a UE.
Window Description
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.
LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points form the track of cells where frequent
handovers occur.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Interference Theme
Analysis Type.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
Parameters of the interference theme:
l Index: serial number
l Road NO.: problematic point number
l Start Time: start time of a problematic road
l End Time: end time of a problematic road
l Start Longitude: start longitude of a problematic road
l Start Latitude: start latitude of a problematic road
l End Longitude: end longitude of a problematic road
l End Latitude: end latitude of a problematic road
l Primary Serving Cell Name: name of a primary serving
cell
l Primary Serving Cell PCI: PCI of a primary serving cell
l Neighboring Cell PCI(NoDom): PCI of a neighboring
cell (no primary serving cell)
l Primary Serving Cell PCI(OverCoverage): PCI of the
primary serving cell (overshoot coverage)
l Primary Serving Cell Name(OverCoverage): name of the
primary serving cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell PCI(OverCoverage): PCI of a
neighboring cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell Name(OverCoverage): name of a
neighboring cell (overshoot coverage)
l Neighboring Cell PCI(Overlay): PCI of a neighboring
cell (overlapping coverage)
l Neighboring Cell Name(Overlay): name of a
neighboring cell (overlapping coverage)
l MOD3 Cell PCI: PCI of a cell between which and the
primary serving cell mod 3 conflicts exist
l MOD3 Cell Name: name of a cell between which and
the primary serving cell mod 3 conflicts exist
l Interference Cause: interference cause
– Interference
Window Description
– Neighboring OverCoverage
– MOD3
l Adjustment Advice: optimization suggestion
– If this theme does not overlap the coverage theme,
you are advised to check parameter settings.
– If this theme overlap the coverage theme, the
optimization suggestion is the same as that for the
coverage theme.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.
LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Throughput Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style Start Time, End Time, Start Longitude,
Start Latitude, End Longitude, End Latitude, Serving Cell,
Neighbor Cell, Adjustment Advice.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.
LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles collected by both UEs and
scanners. The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by
both UEs and scanners are the same. The following description takes how to view the
coverage analysis results of DT logfiles collected by UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the LTE coverage analysis type by referring to Setting the LTE Exception Event Theme
Analysis Type.
Step 2 Import LTE engineering parameters by referring to Importing LTE Engineering
Parameters.
Step 3 Calculate the cell radius by referring to Calculating the Cell Radius.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the LTE
Theme(UE) tab page containing the theme analysis results.
LTE UE Theme Point Displays the detailed theme analysis results in a table. If no
Information window theme analysis result is displayed, solve this problem by
referring to 20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme
Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the LTE UE Theme Point Information window, each
row indicates one cell and each column indicates the
parameters related to the cell. For example, Question Road
NO., Question Style, End Time, End Longitude, End
Latitude, Serving Cell, Serving Cell PCI.
NOTE
In the Theme Point Information window, double-click a line of
analysis result and drill down the theme analysis result. Problem
areas are displayed as red.
LTE UE Theme Detail Lists detailed information about the theme analysis result in
window a table.
The table fields include Type, EARFCN, CellID, CellName,
PCI, RSRP, RSRQ, PCC SINR, and RSSI.
LTE UE Theme Map Displays the detailed theme analysis results on a map. For
window relevant operations in the LTE UE Theme Map window,
see 6.4.3 Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the LTE UE Theme Map window, In the
two area boxes in the lower part of the Theme Detail window,
you can view the latitude and longitude information about the
selected DT point and the cell-related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the active set through
solid lines and to the cells in the monitor set through broken
lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab page on the map,
you can select different layers to view the abnormal DT points
and cell information related to different themes.
----End
Context
Earlier Assistant versions do not support intelligent analysis on GEN VoLTE DT data, and
high engineer skills are required. Analysis on ROMES VoLTE DT data is also not supported,
causing low project delivery efficiency and high costs. If intelligent analysis on VoLTE DT
data is supported, VoLTE DT problem locating efficiency can be improved, engineer skill
requirements can be lowered, and costs can be reduced.
Procedure
Step 1 Create a project by referring to Setting the LTE Exception Event Theme Analysis Type.
Step 3 In the displayed VoLTE Theme Setting dialog box, set the VoLTE theme analysis type. For
details about the parameters, see 19.15 Parameters for Setting the VoLTE Analysis Type.
After the analysis task is executed, the VoLTE Theme tab page containing the theme analysis
results is automatically displayed. Figure 11-9 (GEN VoLTE) or Figure 11-10 (ROMES
VoLTE) describes the VoLTE Theme tab page. Table 11-7 describes the windows on the
VoLTE Theme tab page.
NOTE
You can right-click the analysis group for which the analysis task is executed on the Project tab page
and choose LTE Theme Result > VoLTE Result from the shortcut menu to manually open the VoLTE
Theme tab page containing the theme analysis results.
Window Description
VoLTE Theme Map window Displays the detailed theme analysis results
on a map. For relevant operations in the
VoLTE Theme Map window, see 6.4.3
Map-related Operations.
l Red points stand for abnormal DT points.
l Green points stand for normal DT points.
NOTE
l Click a DT point in the VoLTE Theme Map
window, In the two area boxes in the lower
part of the Theme Detail window, you can
view the latitude and longitude information
about the selected DT point and the cell-
related information.
The DT point is connected to the cells in the
active set through solid lines and to the cells
in the monitor set through broken lines.
l Under Theme Layer on the Map Layers tab
page on the map, you can select different
layers to view the abnormal DT points and
cell information related to different themes.
Side2
Distance between place1 and place2 Indicates the distance between place 1 and
place 2.
Parameter Description
----End
Context
You can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information only by cell. In addition, you
can drill down the detailed coverage analysis information about only one cell at a time.
The Assistant supports the coverage analysis for the DT logfiles of both UEs and scanners.
The methods for viewing the coverage analysis results of DT logfiles of UEs and scanners are
the same. The following description takes how to view the coverage analysis results of DT
logfiles of UEs as an example.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the TD-SCDMA coverage overlap analysis type.
On the Project tab page, right-click an analysis set node for which the analysis task is complete and
choose TD-SCDMA Theme Result > UE Result from the shortcut menu to manually enter the TD-
SCDMA Theme(UE) tab page and view the analysis results of UEs.
----End
Context
The Assistant determines whether measurement cells are neighboring cells according to the
RSCP and Ec/Io values of the measurement cells. After that, the Assistant compares the data
of these determined neighboring cells with the imported neighboring cell data, if the imported
neighboring cell data does not contain the data of any determined neighboring cells, the
determined neighboring cell is considered as a missing neighboring cell.
The Assistant supports the TD-SCDMA missing neighboring cell analysis for the DT logfiles
collected by scanners.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the missing neighboring TD-SCDMA cell analysis type.
On the Project tab page, right-click an analysis set node for which the analysis task is complete and
choose TD-SCDMA Theme Result > Scanner Result from the shortcut menu to manually enter the
TD-SCDMA Theme(Scanner) tab page and view the analysis results.
Theme Result View window Lists the missing neighboring cell analysis
result in a table. If the analysis result is
empty, see 20.6 What Should I Do When
No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?.
In the Theme Result View window, cell
parameter information is displayed by row.
For parameter description, see Theme
Result Review window.
NOTE
----End
This section describes how to view the analysis results. The Assistant can display the IEs and
KPIs in charts and tables in the map, chart, and list views.
13.1 Viewing IE Analysis Results
This section describes how to view IEs. After an analysis task is executed, you can take
analysis group as an object and view the statistical results of IEs in each analysis group on the
IE tab page or in multiple IE view windows. You can also present multiple IEs in a view
window so that different IEs or the same IE of different analysis groups can be compared and
analyzed.
13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis Results
This section describes how to view KPI analysis results. After an analysis task is executed,
you can view and analyze KPI or events related to KPIs by analysis group.
13.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Event View Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the Event information in a map window, , or
a table window on the Event tab page. This helps you learn the overall distribution of each
Event of DT data in an analysis group.
13.4 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Messages View Windows
After an analysis task is executed, you can view the messages information in a map window, a
chart window, or a table window on the Messages tab page. This helps you learn the overall
distribution of each messages of DT data in an analysis group.
13.5 IE Combination Query
This section describes how to use the IE combination query function to query IE statistics
when one or more IEs meet certain conditions. You can also query the statistical result of
events that occur at the same time with these IEs so that you can efficiently learn the network
status and analyze network problems.
Prerequisites
l You have set an IE template and selected IEs to be viewed. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting
KPI Template and IE Template.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Project tab and select an analysis group to be viewed in Analysis Group.
l Click the IEs one by one in the lower part of the Project tab page. For details about the
IEs, see Table 13-1.
l Type an IE to be queried in the text box of the line where is located, and press
Enter.
Scanner WCDMA TopN IEs of a WCDMA network that are displayed after the
top N data of a scanner is analyzed.
GSM TopN IEs of a GSM network that are displayed after the top N
data of a scanner is analyzed.
LTE TopN IEs of an LTE network that are displayed after the top N
data of a scanner is analyzed.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can view the statistical information about the IEs that are listed on the Project tab page in
multiple view windows.
Prerequisites
l The IEs are displayed on the IE tab page. For details, see 13.1.1 Viewing the Analysis
Results on the Project Tab Page.
l You have installed the Google Earth on your PC before viewing indicators on the Google
Earth.
Context
The modes of displaying IEs are as follows:
l Map
Different IEs are displayed as different layers in a map window. The statistical
information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different analysis groups) can be displayed
in a map window.
l Chart window
The chart window is categorized into the line chart window, pie chart window, and
histogram window. The statistical information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different
analysis groups) can be displayed in a line chart window. The statistical information of
only one IE can be displayed on a pie chart window or a histogram window.
l Table window
The statistical information of multiple IEs (including IEs of different analysis groups)
can be displayed in a table window.
Each window can be displayed in two modes:
l The window, displayed in a new window, is used to display the distribution of a certain
IE.
l The window, displayed in the current active window, is used to compare the data of the
same IE in different analysis groups.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
NOTE
View data in a Map window Right-click an IE and choose Display On Map from the
new window shortcut menu.
View data in the current active Right-click an IE and choose Display On Active View
window Type from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
View Type can be map window, line chart window, or table
window.
NOTE
The IEs under the Common node on the IE tab page can be displayed in a map window, Google Earth
window, line chart window, or table window. IEs under the Common node are displayed on a map,
Google Earth, line chart, or table.
Step 4 View the selected IE windows on the Overview tab page. IE windows can be synchronously
displayed on the Overview tab page.
NOTE
You can drag and drop an IE on the IE tab page to display it in the current active window. Alternatively,
you can drag and drop multiple IEs to display them in the current active window. You can drag an NE to
an open view or drag multiple IEs to one view.
l View data in the map window. For details, see Figure 13-1.
In the Map Layers navigation tree, choose Data Layers > IE Layer, select the IE
names and legends to be viewed on the map.
You can also select multiple IEs to display them as layers on the map.
For details on relevant operations in the map window, see Setting Layer Display
Properties and Configuring Legends.
l View IEs in a chart window or a table window.
– For details on the chart window, see 19.2 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in
the Chart View Window.
– For details on the table window, see 19.3 Interface Description: Viewing IEs in
the Table View Window.
l View data in the Measurement Information window.
Choose View > Measurement Information on the menu bar. The Measurement
Information window is displayed.
On the Overview tab page, the information in the Measurement Information window
and table view window can be displayed synchronously.
l In the map window, locate the pointer to a cell layer, the information about engineering
parameter fields of this cell is displayed. Engineering parameter fields vary according to
the network system.
NOTE
After engineering parameters are imported into the Assistant, the information about an engineering
parameter field is displayed only after the engineering parameter field matches the field in the
Assistant. Otherwise, the field information is not displayed.
l In the map window, select a DT point and then view the related information in the sub-
windows in the Theme Detail window. Note that you can press the UP (LEFT) arrow
key or DOWN (RIGHT) arrow key to switch from one DT point to another DT point.
NOTE
Press the UP (LEFT) arrow key to switch to the previous DT point or DOWN (RIGHT) arrow
key to switch to the next DT point.
----End
Context
The Assistant provides the following types of view windows: air interface parameter view,
message view, theme result view, map view, and theme detail view. If the existing view
windows cannot meet your requirement, you can customize view windows.
On the Assistant, data in the view windows are displayed in charts, lists, or combination of
charts and lists. For details about view windows, see 13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in
the Predefined View Windows.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > Forms or shortcut menu options to open the view windows to view the test
data.
The view windows that can be opened vary according to analysis scenarios. For example, the
Theme Result View can be opened only when theme analysis results are queried.
Step 2 Optional: Set the attributes of view windows as required.
For details, see 13.1.4 Configuring the View Window.
----End
Prerequisites
You have opened the view window to be configured. For details about how to open a view
window, see 13.1.3 Viewing the Analysis Results in the Predefined View Windows.
Context
For details about view windows, see 19.4 Interface Description: View Window
Management.
Procedure
l Configure the Layer-3 message view window and event view window.
a. In the L3 Message window or Event window, Right-click and then choose one
message or event > Properties, A dialog box is displayed for you to configure the
attributes of the view window.
b. Set the window name in Name.
c. Select the messages to be analyzed on the Messages tab page.
d. Select the events to be analyzed on the Events tab page.
e. Set the parameter display style on the Columns tab page.
n Select the parameters to be displayed by clicking >, >>, <, or <<.
n Adjust the sequence of displayed parameters by clicking Up or Down.
n Set the parameter name by clicking Edit.
f. Click OK.
l Configure the theme result view window.
a. Click on the toolbar in the Theme Result View window. The Columns dialog
box is displayed.
b. Set the parameter display style.
n Select the parameters to be displayed by clicking >, >>, <, or <<.
n Adjust the sequence of displayed parameters by clicking Up or Down.
c. Click OK.
----End
Prerequisites
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l A KPI is selected. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
Context
The KPI analysis results are the analysis results of only the KPIs that are selected in the KPI
template.
After an analysis task is executed, you can view or copy KPI analysis results on the Overview
tab page.
The Assistant can search for and filter the KPI drilldown events, which help you search for
certain KPI events.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > KPI Result on the menu bar. The KPI Result window is displayed.
If... Then...
View KPI analysis results of all The following methods can be applied:
analysis groups l Choose View > KPI Reslut on the menu bar. The
KPI Result window is displayed.
l On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis Group
and choose View KPI Result from the shortcut menu.
The KPI Result dialog box is displayed.
View KPI analysis results of a 1. On the Project tab page, choose Analysis Group >
specific analysis group Analysis Group Name.
2. Right-click an analysis group and choose View KPI
Result from the shortcut menu. The KPI Result
dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 In the KPI Result dialog box, view or copy KPI analysis results and search for or filter KPI-
related events.
For the details about the area divisions of the interface, see 19.20 Interface Description:
Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window.
If... Then...
View KPI analysis l In area (1) in the KPI Result dialog box, double-click a
results KPI. Then, the related information is displayed in areas (2),
(3), and (4).
Copy KPI analysis In area (1), right-click one or multiple KPIs and choose Copy
results from the shortcut menu to copy KPI analysis results.
NOTE
l You can also press Ctrl + C to copy KPI analysis results.
l To export results successfully, you must ensure that the format of
the copied KPIs must be consistent with the format selected in the
KPI Results dialog box.
If... Then...
Search for or filter KPI- 1. Double-click a KPI in area (4) to view the KPI-related
related events events in area (2).
2. Right-click one or multiple KPIs in area (2) and choose
Find from the shortcut menu to search for KPI-related
events.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
You can further drill down events in area (2) to view the details about KPI analysis results.
For details, see 14.2 Drilling Down Event Analysis Results.
Prerequisites
l The Events are displayed on the Event tab page. For details, see 13.1.1 Viewing the
Analysis Results on the Project Tab Page.
l You have installed the Google Earth on your PC before viewing indicators on the Google
Earth.
Context
The modes of displaying Events are as follows:
l Map
Different Events are displayed as different layers in a map window. The statistical
information of multiple Events (including Events of different analysis groups) can be
displayed in a map window.
l Table window
The statistical information of multiple Events (including Events of different analysis
groups) can be displayed in a table window.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the Event name to be viewed in .
View data in a Map window Right-click an Event and choose Display On Map from
new window the shortcut menu.
View data in the current active Right-click an Event and choose Display On Active
window View Type from the shortcut menu.
NOTE
View Type can be map window, or table window.
Step 4 View the selected Event windows on the Overview tab page. Event windows can be
synchronously displayed on the Overview tab page.
NOTE
You can drag and drop an Event on the Event tab page to display it in the current active window.
Alternatively, you can drag and drop multiple Events to display them in the current active window. You
can drag an NE to an open view or drag multiple Events to one view.
l View data in the map window. For details, see Figure 13-2.
In the Map Layers navigation tree, choose Data Layers > Event Layer, select the
Event names and legends to be viewed on the map.
You can also select multiple Events to display them as layers on the map.
For details about relevant operations in the map window, see Setting Layer Display
Properties and Configuring Legends.
l In the map window, locate the pointer to a cell layer, the information about engineering
parameter fields of this cell is displayed. Engineering parameter fields vary according to
the network system.
NOTE
After engineering parameters are imported into the Assistant, the information about an engineering
parameter field is displayed only after the engineering parameter field matches the field in the
Assistant. Otherwise, the field information is not displayed.
----End
Context
The statistical information of multiple Messages (including Messages of different analysis
groups) can be displayed in a table window.
Procedure
Step 1 Click the Project tab and search for the message name to be viewed in .
View data in a Table view Right-click an IE and choose Display On Sheet from
new window window the shortcut menu.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have set an IE template and selected the IEs to be queried. For details, see 6.2.1
Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Context
The IE combination query function enables you to obtain the query results from the database
by setting a set of IE query conditions. The query results are displayed by analysis group on
the Assistant. For example, to learn the coverage status of an island, you can set TA to greater
than or equal to 2 and RxLev to greater than -80 dBm to query the statistical results of TA,
RxLev, and other IEs (such as BER and FER) and of the events that occur at the same time
with these IEs (such as handovers and call drops). You can also query the results on a map or
in a table.
You can query the results by IE, time, or region. Alternatively, you can query the results by
combining the three conditions in any form.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Combine Query. The New Query dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 13-3.
Step 2 In the Query Name text box, edit the query name. The first query name is Query1 by default.
Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by IE.
IE NOTE
If you need to view dynamic IEs after the query, expand the dynamic IE
nodes in the IE tree before creating a query task.
Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by time.
time
Query the statistics by See Setting the conditions for querying by region.
region
c. Click OK.
The system adds the set query conditions to the IE Filter Condition area.
d. Optional: Perform step a through c to add more conditions for querying by IE.
Select a set condition for querying by IE and click Delete to delete the condition.
Click Clear to delete all set conditions for querying by IE.
l Setting the conditions for querying by time
a. In the Time Filter Condition area, click Add. The Add Time Condition Item
dialog box is displayed.
b. Set Start Time and End Time, as shown in Figure 13-5.
NOTE
The start time must be earlier than the end time.
c. Click OK.
Then, the system adds the set query conditions to the Time Filter Condition area.
You can add multiple subconditions in the Time filter condition area. The system
analyzes the IEs that meet any of the subconditions.
l Setting the conditions for querying by region
a. Select the region mode in the row where Logical Operation resides.
n in: statistics within the region are collected.
n outside: statistics outside the region are collected.
b. In the Region Filter Condition area, select the region where the IE resides.
Step 7 In the Available IE area, select the IEs to be queried and add them to the Selected IE area.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
The IE combination query result is automatically saved in the project. You can view the IE
combination query result when opening the project next time.
l You can create a maximum of five query tasks for one analysis group. The query
comparison results are displayed on a map or sheet.
l If you need to modify the query conditions, right-click a query name and choose Modify
Query from the shortcut menu to reset the IE combination query conditions.
l If you need to delete a query task, right-click the query task name and choose Delete
Query from the shortcut menu to delete the query task.
l If you need to delete all query tasks, right-click a query task name and choose Query >
Clear Query to delete all query tasks.
l If you need to modify a query task name, right-click the query task name and choose
Rename Query from the shortcut menu to change the query task name.
After an analysis task is executed, you can drill down IEs and KPI-related events in the map
window. After drilling down an IE or event, the Assistant provides detailed analysis
information about the IE or event, which helps locate network problems.
NOTE
The drill-down page does not display key HiSilicon events and user-defined software events.
When you drill down the analysis result of an IE or event, the result is displayed associatedly based on
the DT data parsing sequence. Locate the row of the latest time point and search for the specific IE or
event upwardly.
Prerequisites
l An IE template is set. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and IE Template.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Procedure
l Drill down a DT point.
a. Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map. The Map window is
displayed.
c. Double-click a DT point. The IE Drill Down window is displayed.
In the IE Drill Down window, set the drilldown time range. The Assistant then
drills down the detailed indicators of the IE according to the DT data collected
within the specified time range.
d. Click OK.
After the system drills down the IEs, windows are displayed to show the drilldown
results. For description about each window, see View Windows Predefined for IE/
Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
NOTE
IE drilldown can be performed in the Chart window or Sheet window.
l Drill down multiple DT points.
a. Click the Project tab and search for the IE name to be viewed in .
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map. The Map window is
displayed.
Example
l Figure 14-1 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of GSM IEs.
l Figure 14-2 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of WCDMA
IEs.
l Figure 14-3 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of LTE IEs.
l Figure 14-4 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of TD-SCDMA
IEs.
Prerequisites
l You have viewed the KPI analysis results. For details, see 13.2 Viewing KPI Analysis
Results.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
Context
You can drill down GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, TD-SCDMA and LTE events. The procedure
for drilling down GSM events is the same as that for drilling down WCDMA events and LTE
events.
Procedure
l In area (2) in the KPI Result window, drill down events.
For details about the area divisions of the KPI Result dialog box, see 19.20 Interface
Description: Viewing KPI Results in the KPI Result Window.
Drill down multiple 1. Right-click in area (2), and then choose Select
events All from the shortcut menu.
2. Right-click the selected events, and then choose
Drill Down from the shortcut menu.
b. Set the time range for the event drilldown in the Event Drill Down dialog box.
The Assistant drills down the indicators related to one or multiple events in the DT
data that is collected within the specified time range.
c. Click OK.
After the system drills down the events, windows are displayed to show the
drilldown results. For description about each window, see View Windows
Predefined for IE/Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
l Drill down events in the map window.
a. Drill down events.
If you want to... Then...
b. In the Event Drill Down window, set the drilldown time range.
The Assistant then drills down the detailed indicators of events according to the DT
data collected within the specified time range.
c. Click OK.
After the system drills down the events, windows are displayed to show the
drilldown results. For description about each window, see View Windows
Predefined for IE/Event Drilldown Analysis Results.
----End
Example
l Figure 14-5 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of GSM events.
l Figure 14-6 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of WCDMA
events.
l Figure 14-7 shows the window displaying the drilldown analysis results of LTE events.
Prerequisites
The drilling analysis has been performed.
Context
After the drilling analysis is performed, you can customize the display of IE analysis results in
the current view or a new view to browse details.
Procedure
Step 1 Add IEs.
Step 2 Choose View > Forms > Templates > Custom Window. The Custom Window dialog box is
displayed.
Step 3 Right-click in the Custom Window dialog box, and choose Set Title. The Dialog dialog box
is displayed.
Step 4 Set the view name in the Window Title dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have configured the IE template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting KPI Template and
IE Template.
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Procedure
l The steps are as follows:
a. Click the Project tap page. Enter the name of the IE in to search for it.
b. Right-click the required IE and choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu.
The Map window is displayed.
c. Double-click a DT point, The IE Drill Down dialog box is displayed.
In the IE Drill Down dialog box, set the time for drilling the data. The Assistant
will drill detailed counters of the IE from the DT data specified by the time range.
d. Click Export. The Drill Down Export Data window is displayed.
Select the IE or events to be exported.
NOTE
The contents for the nodes except Session App Throughput UL and Session App
Throughput DL under the PS Analysis node are exported as separate tables.
e. Select Export Path. The Please Select the file path window is displayed. Enter the
file name and click Save.
The file is saved in csv format.
f. Click OK. The selected IE or events are exported. Open the file to view the result.
NOTE
The result can be drilled in the Chart and Sheet windows of the IE.
----End
This section describes how to generate an analysis report. The Assistant supports the
generation of comprehensive and professional network analysis reports in batches. After an
analysis task is executed, the Assistant generates an analysis report according to the
configured report template. After an analysis task is executed, if you want to generate an
analysis report in other formats, you can selectively generate an analysis report for the
analysis groups that are analyzed completely. The analysis task needs not to be executed
again, thus improving analysis efficiency.
15.1 Analysis Report Types
This section describes the report types supported by the Assistant. The report types supported
are word, excel and PDF.
15.2 Using Report Wizard to Generate a Report
This section describes how to generate one or multiple custom reports with report wizard.
15.3 Generating Reports by Analysis Group
After an analysis task is executed for analysis groups, the Assistant generates an analysis
report according to the preset report template. If you want to generate an analysis report in
other formats, you can selectively generate an analysis report for the analysis groups that are
analyzed completely. The analysis task does not need to be executed again, and therefore
analysis efficiency is improved.
15.4 Generating a Benchmark Report
This section describes how to generate a benchmark report. The benchmark report can show
the comparison analysis of the network data of different operators in different scenarios so
that operators evaluate the network quality by observing the statistical rank of the network
performance. In addition, the benchmark report can show the comparison analysis of the data
before and after the network optimization so that operators learn the operating status of the
swapped network by observing the differences between the KPIs before and after the network
optimization.
15.5 Generating a Single Site Verification Report
This section describes how to generate a single site verification report. A single site
verification report is an analysis report for a single site, which consists of the information
about the common indicators such as the call drop rate, handover success rate, and FTP rate.
Especially at the early stage of network deployment, a single site verification report can help
you learn the operating status of a single site so that the workload of manual report output is
reduced and work efficient is improved.
15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports
This section describes how to generate service statistical reports, which contain MOC and
MTC event and delay information and can help optimization engineers analyze failure causes.
15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports
This section describes how to generate custom cluster reports, and can help optimization
engineers analyze failure causes.
15.8 Generating a Cross Table Report
A cross table report is an .xls file composed of multiple sheets. It shows the HSDPA-related
IEs. A comparison report chart can be generated for users to learn the relationship between
HSDPA-related IEs.
15.9 Generating a Speech Quality Evaluation Report
A speech quality evaluation report is an .xls file composed of three sheets. This report
provides the percentage and coding mode of each MOS. A comparison report chart can be
generated for users to learn the relationship between MOSs and speech coding modes.
15.10 Generating an Indoor Distribution Report
Based on the tests on the indoor network environment and the corresponding test logs,
engineers can obtain the indoor distribution reports differentiated by scenario and analyze
those reports. This helps engineers to save time and improve efficiency and accuracy.
Prerequisites
The data has been analyzed.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose report mode.
1. Choose Report > Report Guide. The Report Guide window is displayed.
2. Select a report template, as shown in Figure 15-1.
NOTE
If KPIs and IEs in the report template are not present in a project, the data related to the KPIs and
IEs are not displayed in the generated report.
3. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report
in PDF format.
Step 2 Set the report.
1. Click Project Setting to open the dialog box for setting a report.
You can set the attributes of the report, for example, whether to combine reports and
whether to display Legend on the map. For detailed parameter descriptions, see 6.2.2
Setting Report Attributes.
2. Click OK.
Step 3 (Optional) Set the report filtering criteria.
1. Click Next. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-2.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Time Filter Condition area, click Add.
The Add Time Condition Item dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-4.
6. Set the start time and end time. Then, click OK.
7. Click Next.
8. In the displayed dialog box, select the value for Logical Operation.
9. Click OK. The Assistant starts to export the report.
----End
analyzed completely. The analysis task does not need to be executed again, and therefore
analysis efficiency is improved.
Prerequisites
l A project has been created. For details about how to create a project, see 6.1 Creating a
Project.
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l Engineering parameter data has been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Context
The Assistant generates analysis reports in the following scenarios:
l Scenario 1
Before an analysis task is executed, you need to set the analysis report template for the
analysis group. After the analysis task is executed, the Assistant generates an analysis
report according to the preset analysis report template.
l Scenario 2
After an analysis task is executed, if you need to generate analysis reports that are not set
in the analysis report template, you can select the required analysis report templates and
do not need to execute the analysis task again.
If KPIs and IEs in the report template are not present in a project, the values of the KPIs
and IEs are empty in the generated report.
If the report templates available in the system cannot meet your need, you can contact Huawei
engineers to customize a template, and then choose Tool > Import System Configuration
from the menu bar to import the configuration file. For details, see 20.2 How Do I Import
Configuration Information.
Procedure
l Generate an analysis report in scenario 1.
a. Configure a report template.
If You Need To... Then...
Use the customized Customize the report template that meets the actual
report template service requirements according to the method of
customizing the report template. For details, see 17.3
Customizing Reports.
iii. In the Generate Report dialog box, select one or multiple analysis report
templates.
iv. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to
generate a report in PDF format.
v. Click OK.
After you select the analysis report template, the system displays the report
generation progress automatically. After an analysis report is generated, the
system switches to the report save path. The report format is DOC, XLS, or
PDF. The name of a report is composed of report template name and analysis
group name. The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the
project file\Report, for example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
----End
Prerequisites
An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Context
The Benchmark report can be generated as Word or Excel files. The Assistant provides the
following Benchmark report templates by default:
l GSM CS Report
l GSM PS Report
l LTE ATU Report
l LTE Scanner Report
l LTE Theme(Word)
l LTE UE Report
l TD-SCDMA CS Report
l TD-SCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA CS Report
l WCDMA PS Report
l WCDMA Scanner Report
The report includes a cover, comparison analysis result of common KPIs, display of key IEs
on a map, and statistical information about key events.
The Assistant can perform analysis on two to six analysis groups and generate analysis groups
based on the benchmark report template. This helps you view analysis results of different
analysis groups.
If the benchmark report template provided by the Assistant does not meet your requirements,
you can contact Huawei engineers to customize a template. Then, choose Tools > Import
System Configuration on the menu bar to import configuration files information. For details,
see 20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Benchmark on the menu bar. The Generate Benchmark Report window
is display. as shown in Figure 15-6.
Step 3 Select the analysis groups to be compared and viewed in the Choose Analysis Group dialog
box.
NOTE
The analysis task for the analysis groups must be executed.
Step 6 (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report in
PDF format.
Step 7 Select the path for saving the benchmark analysis report in Save Path.
The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the project file\Report, for
example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
Step 8 Click OK.
After a benchmark report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the save path of
the benchmark report for you to view it.
----End
you learn the operating status of a single site so that the workload of manual report output is
reduced and work efficient is improved.
Prerequisites
l The neighboring cell data is imported. For details, see 6.3.3 Importing Neighboring
Cell Data.
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task is executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Context
By default, the Assistant provides the following single site verification reports:
l Excel:
– CDMA SSV
– GSM SSV
– LTE SSV
– LTE VoLTE SSV
– TD-SCDMA SSV
– WCDMA SSV
l Word:
– GSM SSV
– WCDMA SSV
– LTE SSV
– LTE VoLTE SSV
The Assistant generates a report according to the selected single site verification report
template, which helps you learn the operating status of the site.
If the single site verification report template provided by the Assistant does not meet your
requirements, you can contact Huawei engineers to customize a template. Then, choose Tools
> Import System Configuration on the menu bar to import configuration files information.
For details, see 20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > SSV on the menu bar. The Generate Single Site Verification Report
window is displayed. as shown in Figure 15-7.
Step 2 Select the analysis groups to be viewed in the Generate Single Site Verification Report
dialog box.
1. Click Add to select a site.
In the Select One Site window, you can use the Filter function to filter Site ID or Site
Name to quickly find a site.
2. Click OK.
3. Double-click the Report Template column in the line where the selected site belongs.
The SSV Template Select dialog box is displayed. Select an RAT and format and click
OK.
4. In the Stationary Test Analysis Group line, click Select. The Choose Analysis Group
dialog box is displayed. Select a fixed-point test data analysis group and click OK.
5. In the Drive Test Analysis Group line, click Select. The Choose Analysis Group
dialog box is displayed. Select a fixed-point drive test data analysis group and click OK.
6. In the Report Map Background line, select a report map background.
– No Background: indicates no background map.
– MapInfo Map: indicates the MapInfo map background.
– Google Earth: indicates the Google Earth map background.
7. Click Browse next to Save Path to select a path for saving the site verification analysis
report.
The default path for saving the report is: Path for saving the project file\Report, for
example, D:\Untitled Project\Report.
8. (Optional) You can select PDF Report in the lower part of the page to generate a report
in PDF format.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l You have added a report tepmlate. For details, see 17.3.3 Creating an Office Report
Template.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Business Statistics > Business Statistics Report from the menu bar. The
Business Statistics window is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-8.
Step 2 Select an analysis set in the Analysis Group text box and
Step 3 Select a report template from the template list.
Step 4 Select Report Base, The Report Base Select window is displayed, select the type of the
business.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have imported the engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l You have executed an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
l You have added a report template. For details, see 17.3.3 Creating an Office Report
Template.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Custom Report > Custom Cluster Report from the menu bar. The
Generate Custom Cluster Report window is displayed, as shown in Figure 15-9.
The analysis group on the left is created during project implementation and the analysis group
on the right is used for editing an Excel report template.
You can map the .gen files and terminals in the analysis group on the left to the analysis group
on the right. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the selected .gen
files or terminals.
You can double-click Cell in the right area. Site information is displayed. Select cell
information about a site. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the
selected cell.
Double-click Query in the right area. In the displayed window, set conditions in IE, Time,
and Region. A report is generated and contains statistical information about the set items.x
Step 4 Select Save Path.
----End
Prerequisites
l The cross table template has been set in the IE template. For details, see 6.2.1 Setting
KPI Template and IE Template.
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l Engineering parameters have been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group name and choose Report > HSDPA
CrossingTable Report from the shortcut menu.
The Assistant automatically displays the progress bar for the report generation. After the
analysis report is generated, the Assistant automatically navigates to the report save path. The
format of the report name is current date (Year+Month+Date+Hour+Minute+Second) and
analysis group name. For details, see 21.4.6 Cross Table Predefined Report.
NOTE
l The cross table shows the mapping between KPIs and is valid only for HSDPA data. If you select
HSDPA CrossingTable Report to generate a report, you must select the IEs related to the HSDPA
in the IE report template.
l The HSDPA CrossingTable Report template can be used for all analysis groups under the Analysis
Group node to generate cross table reports.
----End
Prerequisites
l DT logfiles have been imported. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
l Engineering parameters have been imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
l An analysis group has been created. For details, see 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
l An analysis task has been executed. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Procedure
Step 1 On the Project tab page, right-click Analysis group name and choose Report > MOS
Statistic Report from the shortcut menu.
The Assistant automatically displays the progress bar for the report generation. After the
analysis report is generated, the Assistant automatically navigates to the report save path. The
report name consists of the report template name and analysis group name. For details, see
21.4.7 Speech Quality Evaluation Predefined Report.
NOTE
l The analysis on the relationship between the MOSs and the speech coding rates is only valid for the
speech quality evaluation data. If you select MOS Statistic Report to generate a report, you must
select the IEs related to the MOS in the IE report template.
l The MOS Statistic Report template can be used for all analysis groups under the Analysis Group
node to generate speech quality evaluation reports.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
l You have imported LTE engineering parameters. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the DT logs. For details, see 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 2 Execute an analysis task. For details, see 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 3 Choose Report > Indoor from the main menu. The Indoor Report Setting window is
displayed.
Step 4 Set parameters. For details about parameter descriptions, see 19.40 Parameter Description:
Indoor Report.
Step 5 Click OK.
After a single site verification report is generated, the Assistant automatically switches to the
path for saving the report for you to view it.
----End
The Assistant supports unattended automatic data processing. By monitoring a specific data
directory, the Assistant automatically imports, analyzes, and collects the statistics of data
according to the preset analysis requirements.
16.1 Creating an Automatic Analysis Task
This section describes how to create an automatic analysis task. Each project corresponds to
one automatic analysis task. After setting the analysis configuration items of a project, you
can create and execute an automatic analysis task. Compared with the manual analysis, the
automatic analysis can reduce the time for manually importing data in batches and implement
unattended automatic data processing.
16.2 Executing an Automatic Analysis Task
After creating an automatic analysis task, you need to execute the automatic analysis task to
make the Assistant enter the automatic analysis mode.
Prerequisites
l Engineering parameters are imported. For details, see 6.3.2 Importing Engineering
Parameters.
l An analysis task template is set. For details, see 6.2 Configuring an Analysis Task.
l The directory in which DT logfiles are monitored is created. One project corresponds to
one directory.
Context
The Assistant can analyze the DT data in two modes, that is, manual analysis and automatic
analysis. The two modes cannot be used at the same time but can be mutually switched.
l Manual analysis mode
After setting the analysis configuration items of the project, you can import all DT data
manually and execute the analysis task.
l Automatic analysis mode
After setting the analysis configuration items of the project, you can create and execute
an automatic analysis task. The Assistant automatically completes the data import and
analysis according to the preset analysis requirements.
The automatic analysis function provides the uninterrupted analysis service, shortening the
time difference between tests and test analysis, reducing analysis time, and maximizing the
analysis efficiency.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Automatic Analysis Wizard on the menu bar. The Automatic Analysis
Setting window is displayed. as shown in Figure 16-1.
When analyzing multiple projects, you can click Add to add a maximum of 100 projects.
Step 3 Select the check box next to the automatic analysis task to make the settings take effect.
Step 4 Click OK. Then, the system displays the Automatic Analysis Manager window for
executing the automatic analysis task. For details, see 16.2 Executing an Automatic
Analysis Task.
----End
Prerequisites
l An automatic analysis task is created. For details, see 16.1 Creating an Automatic
Analysis Task.
l DT logfiles are available and are saved in the monitoring directory.
All DT logfiles are categorized by folders. If the folders are categorized by time, the DT
logfiles of different time periods are saved in different folders.
Procedure
Step 1 In the Automatic Analysis Manager window, click on the toolbar to execute the
automatic analysis task, as show in Figure 16-2.
The Assistant starts to monitor the configured monitoring directory for DT logfiles.
Step 2 Add DT logfile folders to the monitoring directory.
When a new DT logfile is added to the monitoring directory, the system identifies all files in
the folder and displays the files through the import list in the Automatic Analysis Manager
window.
Step 3 Check that the DT logfile folders to be imported are added to the monitoring directory.
l If the automatic analysis task mode is set to Time mode, the Assistant automatically
starts to analyze the DT logfiles in these folders when Start time arrives.
l If the automatic analysis task mode is set to Text mode, you need to manually upload
OK.txt to all the folders. After identifying OK.txt, the Assistant starts to analyze the DT
logfiles in these folders.
Step 4 In the Automatic Analysis Manager window, monitor the execution status of the automatic
analysis task, including the logfile name, logfile size, execution progress, and execution
status.
The information about the successfully imported DT logfiles is displayed under the analysis
group node on the navigation tree in the left pane. The corresponding folder name is the name
of the analysis group.
Click on the toolbar. Then, the Assistant stops all automatic analysis tasks and switches
to the manual analysis mode.
NOTE
If the system is analyzing data, the analysis result is incomplete if you stop the automatic analysis task.
----End
17 Customizing Functions
This section describes how to customize functions. The Assistant provides different
predefined events, KPIs, and report templates. In addition, the Assistant provides the function
of customizing KPIs and customizing report templates to meet the actual service requirements
and extended service requirements.
17.1 Customizing KPIs
If the existing KPIs fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom KPIs to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize a KPI based on the predefined KPIs,
events, and IEs.
17.2 Customizing Events
If the existing events fail to meet service requirements, you can create custom events to meet
different analysis requirements. You can customize events based on the predefined events and
IEs.
17.3 Customizing Reports
This section describes how to customize reports. The Assistant displays different analysis
results in reports. You can use the predefined report template to generate analysis reports. If
the existing report template cannot meet the service analysis requirements, you can create
custom report templates.
17.4 Customizing Delays
This section describes how to create a delay through the custom delay provided by the
Assistant when the predefined delay cannot meet the service requirements.
17.5 Predefined IEs
If existing predefined IEs cannot meet service requirements, you can change the threshold
values for predefined IEs to meet the service requirements.
17.6 Custom Chart
The Custom Chart window displays the change of IE value with time. You can customize the
IE indicators to be viewed in the Custom Chart window.
Prerequisites
A project is created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Context
l Counting KPI
A counting KPI consists of the event, IE, and value according to certain calculation
rules. For example, KPI.A = KPI.A + variable + 4. For details about examples, see
17.1.3 Example: Creating a Counting KPI.
l Calculation KPI
A calculation KPI is generated according to simple calculation rules based on existing
counting KPIs or calculation KPIs. For example, KPI.A = KPI.B / KPI.C. For details
about examples, see 17.1.4 Example: Creating a Calculation KPI.
l Modification of KPI parameter thresholds
The Assistant provides the function of modifying the thresholds of certain KPI
parameters, such as Distance on CPICH Ec/Io ≥ -12 dB, CPICH RSCP ≥ -95 dBm
(WCDMA), UE Pilot Pollution Points (WCDMA), Scanner Pilot Pollution Points
(WCDMA), and Distance Sum For RxLev All ≥ -90 dBm (GSM).
Procedure
l Create a counting KPI.
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Choose New > Counting KPI. The Counting KPI Editor dialog box is displayed.
n Click Edit to modify the selected KPI.
n Click Delete to delete the selected KPI.
c. Type the basic information about the custom KPI.
For details, see KPI Editor.
d. Optional: Click Format. The KPI Format Setting dialog box is displayed. Set the
data type. For detailed parameter descriptions, see 19.30 Parameters for Custom
KPIs.
e. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI.
Edit the expression for calculating the KPI in area 2 shown in Figure 17-1. For
descriptions on the dialog box, see KPI Editor.
NOTE
When editing the expression, select the required elements such as IE, event, KPI, and
message for the custom KPI in area 6 shown in Figure 17-1. Select the required function in
area 4, and create a new KPI using the KPI formula. For examples, see 17.1.3 Example:
Creating a Counting KPI.
f. Click OK.
l Create a calculation KPI.
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Choose New > Calculation KPI. The Calculation KPI Editor dialog box is
displayed.
c. Type the basic information about the KPI.
For detailed parameter descriptions, see KPI Editor.
d. Optional: Click Format. The KPI Format Setting dialog box is displayed. For
detailed parameter descriptions, see 19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.
e. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI, as shown in Figure 17-2.
f. Click OK.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After customizing a KPI, you can view it in the Custom KPI Manager window. For details,
see 17.1.2 Managing Defined KPIs.
Prerequisites
l Multiple KPIs exist, including predefined KPIs and custom KPIs.
l A project is created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
l Filter defined KPIs.
– Search for KPIs in the Custom KPI Manager dialog box.
n Type the keyword of the KPIs in the Filter text box. Then, you can search for
KPIs.
n Choose a KPI system from the System drop-down list.
n In Group drop-down list, select the group for filtering.
l Add KPIs. For details, see 17.1.1 Creating Custom KPIs.
l Modify KPIs
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI Manager dialog
box is displayed.
b. Select KPIs to be modified in the KPI area.
c. Click Edit. The Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box is
displayed.
NOTE
You can open the Counting KPI Editor/Calculation KPI Editor dialog box by double-
clicking the KPIs to be modified.
d. Modify parameters related to the KPI. For detailed parameter descriptions, see
19.30 Parameters for Custom KPIs.
e. Click OK.
l Delete one or more defined KPIs.
Select one or more KPIs in the Custom KPI Manager window. Click Delete. The
confirmation dialog box is displayed. The deleted KPIs cannot be restored.
----End
Context
In this example, you will create a KPI named TestDuring.
The KPI is calculated by using the following formula: TestDuring = TestDuring + 1
The KPI is counted when an RRCSetupReq or GSMRRCSetupSuc event occurs.
Procedure
1. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI. The Custom KPI dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose New > Counting KPI. The Counting KPI window is displayed.
3. Type the basic information about the KPI.
– Name: Type the name of the KPI. In this example, the parameter is set to
TestDuring.
– Unit: Set the unit. In this example, the parameter is set to null.
– Group: Set the group information. Custom KPIs are added to the Common-
Custom group.
4. Edit the expression for calculating the KPI.
In this example, the KPI expression is: TestDuring = TestDuring + 1. The expression is
built as follows:
IF(During(HasElement(EVENT(RRCSetupReq)),HasElement(EVENT(RRCSetupSuc))))
{
IF(HasElement(IE(Serving PCI)))
{
KPI(TestDuring) = KPI(TestDuring) + 1;
}
}
Figure 17-3 shows the KPI expression.
Prerequisite
l The calculation KPI DNSResponseSuccess Counter already exists.
l The calculation KPI DNSFailure Counter already exists.
Context
In this example, you can create a KPI named DNS Successs Rate.
Procedure
1. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > KPI on the menu bar. The Custom KPI
Manager window is displayed.
2. Choose Add > Counting KPI. The Calculation KPI Editor window is displayed.
3. Type the basic information about the KPI.
– Name: Type the name of the KPI. In this example, the parameter is set to DNS
Successs Rate.
– Group: Set the group information. The custom KPIs are added to the Custom
group.
– Description: Type the description of the KPI. For example, the call setup success
rate.
4. Click Format. Fill in KPI format information.
– Data Type: Select Float.
– Initial Value: Set the initial value. The default value is 0. You can also enter the
value manually.
– Visible: Select True.
– Data Source: Select Binning.
– Description: Type the description of the KPI. For example, the call setup success
rate.
5. Edit the custom expression for calculating the KPI.
The following KPI formula is used as an example: DNS Successs Rate =
DNSResponseSuccess Counter/(DNSFailure Counter+DNSResponseSuccess
Counter)*100. The setting is as follows:
KPI(DNS Successs Rate) = KPI(DNSResponseSuccess Counter) / (KPI(DNSFailure
Counter) + KPI(DNSResponseSuccess Counter)) * 100
Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Event from the menu bar. The Custom Event
Manager dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click New. The Custom Event Editor dialog box is displayed.
Step 4 Click Format. The Event Format Setting dialog box is displayed. Set the parameter in this
dialog box. For details, see 19.34 Parameters for Custom Events.
You can edit the expression for calculating the event in area 2 in Figure 17-5. For details
about the dialog box, see Parameters in the Custom Event Editor window.
NOTE
When editing the expression, select the required elements, such as IEs, events, and messages for the
custom event in area 6 shown in Figure 17-5. Select the required functions in area 4 to create an event
based on the event expression.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the event is customized, you can view the customized event in the Custom Event
Manager dialog box. For details, see 17.2.2 Managing Events.
Prerequisites
l Multiple events are available, including predefined and custom events.
l A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
l Filtering events
– You can query an event by entering the event keyword in the Filter text box in the
Custom Event Manager dialog box.
l Creating events. For details, see 17.2.1 Creating Custom Events.
l Modifying events
a. Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Event from the menu bar. The Custom
Event Manager dialog box is displayed.
b. Select an event to be modified in the Event area.
c. Click Edit. The Custom Event Editor window is displayed.
NOTE
You can also double-click an event to be modified to enter the Custom Event Editor
window.
d. Modify the event information.
e. Click OK.
l Deleting one or more events
In the Custom Event Manager dialog box, select one or more events. Click Delete. A
confirmation dialog box is displayed.
----End
Prerequisites
A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Context
The report template consists of objects such as the text, table, map, and chart.
The Assistant provides the following methods for adding objects to a template:
l Select the existing object group and add multiple objects at a time to generate a new
report template. The Assistant provides multiple predefined object groups.
l Add objects one by one to generate a new report template.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Report Template on the menu bar. The Custom Report dialog box is
displayed.
2. Click on the toolbar to move the object up and click to move the object down.
In the project, the analysis reports of various analysis groups are generated according to the
custom report template.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After you click , the custom report template is exported in the xml format. You can click
to import this template into the Assistant again.
Prerequisites
l A report template already exists.
l A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Custom > Custom Report on the menu bar. The Custom Report dialog box is
displayed.
Step 2 Click the template to be modified on the Template tab page in the report object area.
Step 3 Double-click the object to be modified and modify its properties in the report properties area.
You can modify the properties of the text, table, map, and chart. For details about parameters,
see 19.31 Parameters for Custom Report Templates.
Step 4 In the report properties area, double-click the indicator to be modified and modify the
properties of the indicator.
Modifying the properties of an indicator involves adding the indicator, deleting the indicator,
and modifying the display mode of the indicator. For details about parameters, see 19.31
Parameters for Custom Report Templates.
2. Click on the toolbar to move the object up and click to move the object down.
In the project, the analysis reports of each analysis group are generated according to the report
template.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After you click , the modified report template is exported in the xml format. You can click
to import this template into the Assistant.
Prerequisites
You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Report > Report Template from the main menu to open the report template window.
Step 3 In the upper area of the Excel file, select the counter replacement format, analysis group
name, and value type.
l The following replacement formats are available:
– Replace Oneself: replaces the selected cell only and supports the report templates
under the Excel node.
– Replace and Down: replaces cell contents downward and supports the report
templates under the Business Statistics Report node.
l If the number of current analysis groups is insufficient when you select analysis group
names, click the last line Add Analysis Group to add analysis groups.
l The following value types are available:
– SUM: total number of counters
– AVG: average value of counters
– MAX: maximum value of a counter
– MAX: minimum value of a counter
– %: ratio of counters in the predefined range
Step 4 Click a cell in the imported Excel file. Then, select a required IE, event, or KPI from the UE-
and scanner-related counters in the window.
You can right-click a counter and select a map display type to view it on a map. The following
types are available:
l Display On Map
l Display On Chart: Multiple counters can be displayed on a chart simultaneously. You
can hold down Ctrl and click the IE tree to select multiple IEs.
l Display On Caky
l Display On Histogram
l Custom Display On Chart: The curve fitting of two counters with different number types
is supported. You can select one counter as X axis and another as Y axis, and set orders.
Step 5 After you edit a template, click another report template name. A dialog box is displayed,
prompting you to save the editing. Click Yes.
Step 6 Generate a report. For detailed operations, see 15.6 Generating Service Statistical Reports
or 15.7 Generating Custom Cluster Reports.
----End
Overview
The report consists of the cover, contents, statistical results of KPIs, IE analysis results, and
event analysis results. You can query the point locations of IEs and events on the map and
their CDF and PDF charts.
Figure 17-6 shows the created template. For details, see 19.31 Parameters for Custom
Report Templates.
Figure 17-7 shows the report generated according to the created template. You can find that
the objects in Figure 17-6 are in a one-to-one relationship with the reports generated in
Figure 17-7.
Figure 17-7 An example of the report generated according to the report template
Figure 17-8 shows the report that is generated according to the template settings.
NOTE
2. Click IE.
Add a counter whose IE is RxLev Sub. Select Map, Legend, Chart-CDF, Chart-PDF,
Statistic Table, LineChart, CakyChart, and Screenshot.
3. Refer to the previous steps to create another report template that shows event analysis
results.
Figure 17-9 shows the report that is generated according to the template settings.
Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Delay on the menu bar. The Custom Delay Manager
dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click New. The Custom OneDelay Config dialog box is displayed. Create a delay.
l Click Edit to modify the selected delay.
l Click Delete to delete the selected delay.
Step 3 Set the basic information for the custom delay in the Custom OneDelay Config dialog box,
as shown in Figure 17-10.
l Type the name of the custom delay in the Name text box.
l Select the network system that the current custom delay belongs to in the System list.
l Select the group where the custom delay belongs in the Group list.
l Click Add Message in the Begin Message and End Message area and add the begin
message (begin event) and end message (end event), respectively.
l Type the threshold of the custom delay in the Times Out text box.
When the delay reported by the terminal is more than Times Out, the Assistant does not
display this delay.
NOTE
If Overlay is selected, after receiving the end message, the Assistant uses the time of the latest
begin message as the counting time; if Overlay is not selected, the Assistant uses the time of the
begin message as the counting time.
l Click OK, the created delay display in the Custom Delay Manager dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
A project has been created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Segment Delay on the menu bar. The Custom Delay
Manager dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click New. The Custom SegmentDelay Config dialog box is displayed. Create a delay.
l Click Edit to modify the selected delay.
l Click Delete to delete the selected delay.
Step 3 Set the basic information for the custom delay in the Custom SegmentDelay Config dialog
box, as shown in Figure 17-11.
l Type the name of the custom delay in the Name text box.
l Select the network system that the current custom delay belongs to in the System list.
l Select the group where the custom delay belongs in the Group list.
l Click Add in the Message area and add the begin message (begin event) and end
message (end event), respectively.
l Type the threshold of the custom delay in the Max Delay text box.
When the delay reported by the terminal is more than Max Delay, the Assistant does not
display this delay.
NOTE
If Overlay is selected, after receiving the end message, the Assistant uses the time of the latest
begin message as the counting time; if Overlay is not selected, the Assistant uses the time of the
begin message as the counting time.
l Click OK, the created delay display in the Custom Delay Manager dialog box.
----End
Prerequisites
You have created a project. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 On the menu bar, choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > Delay > CallDelay Setting. The
MOC&MTC delay rate dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the IE whose delay needs to be modified and enter a new delay in the Timeout
Length text box.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End
Prerequisites
A project is already created. For details, see 6.1 Creating a Project.
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Analysis > Custom Analysis > IE on the toolbar. The Custom IE window is
displayed, as shown in Figure 17-12.
Step 3 Double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box shown in Figure 17-12, view the basic
information about the IE. For details about the parameters, see IE Information dialog box.
Step 4 Double-click the selected IE, the ThresHold Change dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 17-13.
Step 5 Set the threshold value for the predefined IE in Value. For detailed parameter descriptions,
see ThresHold Change dialog box.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Choose View > DrillDown > Templates > Custom Chart on the menu bar. The Custom
Chart window is displayed.
Step 2 Set the properties of a custom chart.
1. Right-click and choose Time from the shortcut menu and set the data volume that can be
displayed currently.
– Default: display the data collected within 3600 seconds.
– Custom: display the data collected within the customized time period.
2. Select IE counters.
Right-click in the window and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Set
Chart Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the required IE counters.
a. Select the IE counter display area: Chart1, Chart2, Chart3, or Chart4. This
section uses Chart1 as an example.
b. Click Edit. The Modify Chart1 Properties dialog box is displayed. Select the IE
counters, as shown in Figure 17-14.
c. Optional: Select an IE in the Selected IE and click Edit. Set the IE display
properties including color, maximum value, and minimum value, as shown in
Figure 17-15.
d. Click OK.
----End
18 Typical Application
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the HTTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see HTTP Events.
Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see HTTP KPI.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the HTTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.
Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.
Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.
----End
18.1.2 FTP
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the FTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see PS Session Events.
Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the FTP tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.
Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.
Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Video Streaming tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see Video Streaming Events.
Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see Video Streaming KPIs.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Video Streaming tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.
Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.
Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.
----End
18.1.4 Email
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Email tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Event > PS from the navigation tree in the left pane to view the events generated
during the test. For descriptions of the events, see Email Events.
Step 6 Choose View > KPI Result from the menu bar to view the KPI information generated during
the test. For descriptions of the KPIs, see Email KPIs.
----End
Prerequisites
l You have obtained the DT logs for the Email tests.
l You have created and configured the project.
Procedure
Step 1 Import the engineering parameters by following instructions provided in 6.3.2 Importing
Engineering Parameters.
Step 2 Import the DT logs by following instructions provided in 6.5 Importing DT Log Files.
Step 3 Create analysis sets by following instructions provided in 7 Creating an Analysis Group.
Step 4 Execute analysis tasks by following instructions provided in 8 Executing an Analysis Task.
Step 5 Choose Report > Report Template. The Report Template window is displayed.
Step 6 Click GSM PS Report or WCDMA PS Report. The KPI information exists in the template.
Edit the template as required or import a new template.
Step 7 Right-click an analysis set and choose Report from the shortcut menu to select the required
report type.
The export progress bar is displayed. After the export is complete, you are navigated to the
path where the report is saved. You can open the report and view it.
----End
Prerequisites
You have created two analysis sets and executed analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see 6
Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an analysis set and choose Delta Analysis from the shortcut menu.
The Delta Analysis Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-1.
For descriptions of the parameters in the Delta Analysis Setting window, see Table 18-1.
Delta IE Select Select the IEs for which delta analysis needs
to be performed.
Result Node Name The node name for the final delta analysis
result. The name can be automatically
generated by the system or manually
modified.
Grid Binning Lenth Grid side length for grid binning. During
delta calculation, the value is used as the
side length of the square for delta averaging.
The unit is meter.
----End
Prerequisites
You have created two analysis sets and executed analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see 6
Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.
NOTE
Procedure
l View Combine Analysis Results of IEs
a. Right-click an analysis set and choose Combine Analysis from the shortcut menu.
The Combine Analysis Setting window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-2.
Table 18-2 lists detailed description about the parameters in the Combine Analysis
Setting window.
Parameter Description
Table 18-3 lists detailed description about the parameters in the Combine Delay
Setting window.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
----End
Prerequisites
You have created analysis groups and executed the analysis tasks. For detailed operations, see
6 Creating Analysis Tasks Manually.
Procedure
Step 1 Right-click an analysis group and choose Conditions Export Data from the shortcut menu.
The Conditions Export Data window is displayed, as shown in Figure 18-4.
Step 3 In the Available IE area, select the IEs to be exported and add them to the Selected IE area.
NOTE
The contents for the nodes except Session App Throughput UL and Session App Throughput DL
under the PS Analysis node are exported as separate tables.
Step 4 Click the icon corresponding to the Export Path parameter to select a data export path and
click Save.
The data can be exported into CSV and TXT files.
----End
19 Interface Reference
This section shows the involved interfaces and the corresponding parameter information.
This section describes the parameters in the Automatic Analysis Setting dialog box. You can
refer to this section when setting an automatic analysis task on the Assistant.
19.37 Parameters for Executing an Automatic Analysis Task
This section describes the parameters for executing an automatic analysis task. You can refer
to this section when you view the properties of an automatic analysis task.
19.38 Parameters for Measurement Information
This section describes the parameters in the Measurement Information window.
19.39 Parameters for Map Setting
This section describes the parameters in the Map Setting dialog box. You can set the color of
lines connecting drive test (DT) points to the cells, borders, and grids.
19.40 Parameter Description: Indoor Report
This section describes the parameters in the Indoor Report Setting dialog box. You can refer
to this section to set the related parameters when you modify the indoor reports.
3 Map display area Displays the information such as the imported map,
DT events, and DT routes.
4 Map status bar Displays the longitude and latitude of the current
position, distance of the test points, and zoom
information of the map.
Map Toolbar
The toolbar in the Map window provides the entry to common outdoor map operations. You
can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For
details, see Table 19-2.
- Arrow -
Tools > Zoom Zoom Out Enables you to zoom out on the map.
Out
Tools > Pan Pan Enables you to move the map. You can
click the map and hold down the mouse
to move the map.
NOTE
In the map window, hold down Ctrl+Alt and
drag the map to move it.
Tools > Center Align Enables you to set any point on the map
Center as the center. You can click the icon and
then click any point on the map. After
that, the map is displayed with the point
as the center.
Tools > Select Single Enables you to select the object contained
Select in the current layer. You can select
multiple objects by holding down Ctrl.
Chart Toolbar
The chart view can be categorized into line chart, pie chart, and histogram, as shown in
Figure 19-3. Table 19-3 describes the items in Figure 19-3. You can right-click an indicator
to navigate to the chart view window.
(1) Chart Toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common chart
operations.
The chart toolbar provides the entry for common chart operations. You can open the related
window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For details about the toolbar,
see Table 19-4.
mouse up and down to move the chart. You can click to switch to the
two-dimensional display mode.
chart with the mouse up and down. You can click to switch to the
two-dimensional display mode.
mouse up and down to adjust the depth of the chart. You can click to
switch to the two-dimensional display mode.
Icon Description
Enables you to edit the basic information about the chart, including
coordinate axis, color, and marks.
After you click this icon, the Editing dialog box is displayed. You can
click on a certain tab page to view the parameters on the tab page.
Enables you to copy the information displayed in the current chart view
window. You can copy the contents of the current chart to the Windows
clipboard by clicking this icon.
l The Sheet tab page displays the IE information. The information about multiple IEs in
different analysis groups can be displayed on the tab page at a time.
NOTE
l Select an IE in the navigation tree on the left and drag the IE to the Sheet tag page.
Information about the IE is displayed on the Sheet tab page.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Drill Down from the shortcut menu to drill
down the IE.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the
Sheet tab page.
l Right-click on the Sheet tab page and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the
Sheet tab page.
l Select the column containing information about an IE on the Sheet tab page. Right-click and
choose Delete from the shortcut menu to delete the IE.
l The Statistics tab page displays the IE statistical information. The statistical information
about multiple IEs in different analysis groups can be displayed on the tab page at a time.
NOTE
This section takes the Theme Detail view, GSM Serving + Neighbor Cell view, Theme Result View
view, and Map view as examples.
(2) Combination view Displays test data by using both the chart and the table
to reflect the value change of each parameter.
(3) Other view Displays test data in tables but the setting of other
view is different from that of the list view. For details,
see 13.1.4 Configuring the View Window.
(4) Map view Displays the statistical results in the map window.
Figure 19-6 shows the Report Template interface. Table 19-6 provides the description of
Figure 19-6.
Report Toolbar
The toolbar in the Custom Report interface provides the entry for common outdoor map
operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain
icons. For the description of the toolbar, see Table 19-7.
Icon Name
Icon Name
Delete object
Move object up
You can modify the property of an object by double-clicking the object in the report property area.
Shortcut Menu
On the Template tab page of the report object area, you can right-click a template and then
add, delete, or rename the report template by using the shortcut menu.
KPI Editor
Figure 19-7 shows the KPI Editor dialog box.
IE Name Description
Frame Type Index AMR_MB Indicates the transmission rate. When the
value of Codec type is AMR, the values are
as follows:
l AMR 4.75 KBIT/S
l AMR 5.15 KBIT/S
l AMR 5.9 KBIT/S
l AMR 6.7 KBIT/S
l AMR 7.4 KBIT/S
l AMR 7.95 KBIT/S
l AMR 10.2 KBIT/S
l AMR 12.2 KBIT/S
l AMR SID (COMFORT NOISE
FRAME)
When the value of Codec type is AMR-
WB, the values are as follows:
l AMR_WB 6.6 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 8.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 12.65 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 14.25 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 15.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 18.25 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 19.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 23.05 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB 23.85 KBIT/S
l AMR_WB SID (COMFORT NOISE
FRAME)
IE Name Description
6 Counter tab Selects the IE, event, or message included in the customized
event expression.
NOTE
For details about RTP Message IE field parameters, see Table 19-9 .
Toolbar
The System Setting dialog box consists of the toolbar, template list, and template content.as
shown in Figure 19-9.
The toolbar in the System Setting dialog box provides entries for common template settings
so that you can add or delete a template by clicking the corresponding icon. For details about
the toolbar, see Table 19-11.
KPI tab page Enables you to select one or multiple KPIs to set the
corresponding alarm thresholds.
Theme tab page Enables you to set the theme analysis type.
CDF Statistics tab page Enables you to set the CDF percentage.
Filter tab page Enables you to set the conditions for filtering DT logfiles.
Site Display tab page Enables you to set the engineering parameter display
properties.
Add Adds a layer above a selected layer. Click Add, select a .tab file
in the displayed dialog box, and then click Open.
Parameter Description
Display Sets the display properties of a selected layer. Click this button.
The Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display
properties of the selected layer in this dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Display Properties Dialog Box.
Labels Sets the label properties of a selected layer. Click this button.
The Label Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label
properties of the selected layer in this dialog box. For details, see
Parameters in the Label Properties Dialog Box.
Zoom Display Within Indicates whether to display a map layer within the
Layering Zoom Range zoom range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).
Visibility Display within Indicates whether to display a label within the zoom
Range range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).
Current Radius Indicates the current radius of a cell. The unit is kilometer (km).
Modified Radius Indicates the modified radius of a cell. The unit is kilometer
(km).
You can select the value of the radius from the drop-down list.
The value range is from 0.02 to 5 kilometers.
OffsetY Indicates the distance of the selected layer offset vertically. The
unit is meter (m).
The positive value offsets upwards. The negative value offsets
downwards.
Parameter Description
IE Name Indicates the name of the IE or event for which the legend is
configured.
Parameter Description
Custom Enables you to configure the legend by using the default segmented
values. For details, see Custom.
Auto Arrange Enables you to configure the legend by using the unsegmented
values. For details, see Auto Arrange.
Custom Arrange Enables you to configure the legend by using the custom segmented
values. For details, see Custom Arrange.
Reverse Enables the system to display the PDF and CDF charts by legend
range of an indicator in descending order in the bar chart view
window.
Custom
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area by referring to the following table.
Insert Before Enables you to insert a legend This option is valid when the IE has
before the legend. a free data area.
Insert After Enables you to insert a legend This option is valid when the IE has
after the legend. a free data area.
Font Specifies the display font of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.
Size Specifies the display size of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.
Shape Specifies the display shape of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.
Color Specifies the display color of a You can refer to the parameter
legend. description when editing IE and
event legends.
example Enables you to preview the You can refer to the parameter
configured legend example. description when editing IE and
event legends.
Min Value Specifies the minimum value of a You can refer to the parameter
range. description when editing IE legends.
If you select the bracket from the
drop-down list, it indicates that
the minimum value is greater
than or equal to the specified
value. If you select the
parenthesis from the drop-down
list, it indicates that the minimum
value is greater than the specified
value.
NOTE
The edited value range cannot
overlap with an existing value
range. This parameter is not
displayed in the dialog box for
modifying event legends.
Max Value Specifies the maximum value of You can refer to the parameter
a range. description when editing IE legends.
If you select the bracket from the
drop-down list, it indicates that
the maximum value is smaller
than or equal to the specified
value. If you select the
parenthesis from the drop-down
list, it indicates that the
maximum value is smaller than
the specified value.
NOTE
The edited value range cannot
overlap with an existing value
range. This parameter is not
displayed in the dialog box for
modifying event legends.
Value Indicates the name of an edited You can refer to the parameter
event. description when editing event
legends.
Auto Arrange
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area by referring to the following table.
Parameter Description
Custom Arrange
You can configure the parameters in the Symbol area.
Arrange...to... Indicates the value range. The default value of the current IE is
the value range.
Parameter Description
Total Number Indicates the number of engineering parameters that do not pass the
check.
Error—Required Indicates that the error level is error when a mandatory field value is
Field invalid.
Warning— Indicates that the error level is warning when an optional field is
Optional Field invalid or the cell global identities (CGIs) of different cells are the
same.
Row Indicates the row of the engineering parameter that does not pass the
check.
Column Indicates the column of the engineering parameter that does not pass
the check.
Name Indicates the field name of the engineering parameter that does not
pass the check.
Value Indicates the value of the engineering parameter that does not pass the
check.
Error Level Indicates the error level of the check failure. The error levels are as
follows:
Error: indicates the error level when a mandatory field value is
invalid.
Error(Duplicate Row Number): indicates the error level when the
location area codes (LACs) and cell identities (CIs) of two or more
cells are the same. The information in the brackets indicates the row
of the engineering parameter of a cell that has the same LAC and CI
with that of another cell.
Warning: indicates the error level when an optional field is invalid or
the cell global identities (CGIs) of different cells are the same.
Warning(Duplicate Row Number): indicates the error level when the
cell global identities (CGIs) of two or more cells are the same. The
information in the brackets indicates the row of the engineering
parameter of a cell that has the same CGI with that of another cell.
GSM > RF Theme Parameters related to the theme analysis type are set.
The parameters to be set vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Parameters for Over Coverage Analysis,
Parameters for Poor Coverage Analysis, Parameters for
Azimuth Garbled Analysis, and Parameters for No Serving
Cell Dominance Analysis.
GSM > Coverage Sets the parameters of the GSM Coverage theme.
GSM > Handover Sets the parameters of the GSM Handover theme.
GSM > Interference Sets the parameters of the GSM Interference theme.
Distance Threshold The default value is 2. Indicates the coefficient of the cell
The recommended coverage distance threshold.
value ranges from 2 to Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
2.5. radius x Distance Threshold
Alarm Threshold The default value is 50 Indicates the alarm threshold of over
and the unit is %. coverage. If the value of a data record
exceeds this threshold, the data record is
displayed in red in the analysis results.
Ratio of Start The default value is 0 Ratio of Start Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance and the unit is %. of the start distance of a coverage
segment.
Start Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
Start Distance
Ratio of End The default value is Ratio of End Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance 1000 and the unit is %. of the end distance of a coverage
segment.
End Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
End Distance
Bound Number The default value is 10. Bound Number: Indicates the number of
coverage segments between the start
distance and the end distance.
Alarm Threshold The default value is 10 Indicates the alarm threshold of the poor-
and the unit is %. coverage rate. If the value of a data
record exceeds this threshold, the data
record is displayed in red in the analysis
results.
Angle Threshold The default value is 20 Indicates the threshold of the azimuth
and the unit is degree. deviation.
Alarm Threshold The default value is 50 Indicates the alarm threshold of the
and the unit is %. azimuth. If the value of a data record
exceeds this threshold, the data record is
displayed in red in the analysis results.
RxLev Threshold The default value is Indicates the threshold of the received
-78 and the unit is level. If the received level exceeds the
dBm. value of this parameter, it exceeds the
threshold.
Ratio of Start The default value is 0 Ratio of Start Distance: Indicates the
Distance and the unit is %. ratio of the start distance of a coverage
segment.
Start Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
Start Distance
Ratio of End The default value is Ratio of End Distance: Indicates the ratio
Distance 1000 and the unit is %. of the end distance of a coverage
segment.
End Distance = Cell radius x Ratio of
End Distance
Bound Number The default value is 10. Indicates the number of boundaries that
are divided for setting distance ranges.
RxLev Diff The default value is 5 Indicates the threshold received level
Threshold and the unit is dBm. difference between the serving cell and
the neighboring cell. If the received level
difference is smaller than the value of this
parameter, it exceeds the threshold.
The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
-47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).
The Rxqual Threshold Value range: 0 to 7. Indicates the threshold of the Rxqual
The default value is 6 level.
(unit: dBm).
The Time Threshold of Value range: 3 to 30. Specifies the upper time threshold for
Continually Handover The default value is consecutive handovers of
10 (unit: s). ContinuallyHO_Times_Thd times in
the areas where handovers occur
frequently.
The Times Threshold Value range: 2 to 10. Specifies the lower threshold for the
of Continually The default value is number of handovers within
Handover 2. ContinuallyHO_Time_Thd in the areas
where handovers occur frequently.
The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
of Poor Coverage -47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).
The RxLev Threshold Value range: -110 to Indicates the threshold of the received
1 of Interference -47. The default level.
value is -90 (unit:
dBm).
WCDMA > Pilot Sets the parameters of the WCDMA pilot pollution analysis.
Pollution For details, see Parameters in the Pilot Pollution Window.
WCDMA > Neighbor Sets the parameters of missing WCDMA neighboring cell
Cell Analysis theme.
For details, see Parameters in the Neighbor Cell Analysis
Window.
WCDMA > Coverage Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Coverage theme.
WCDMA > HO Theme Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Handover theme.
WCDMA > WCDMA Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Interference theme.
Interference
WCDMA > Abnormal Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Abnormal Event theme.
Event In the Abnormal Event dialog box of the Theme tab page,
click Custom Event to add user-defined events.
WCDMA > Throughput Sets the parameters of the WCDMA Throughput theme.
WCDMA > PSC Sets the parameters of the WCDMA PSC Optimization
Optimization theme.
RSCP Threshold Value range: -150 Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
to 0. The default When the maximum RSCP of a DT point is
value is -100 (unit: greater than this threshold, you need to use the
dBm). RSCP Difference parameter to make a
judgment.
RSCP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold of RSCP difference.
is 5 (unit: dBm). If the difference between the maximum RSCP
of a DT point and the RSCP of a neighboring
cell is smaller than this threshold, the
neighboring cell is considered as a neighboring
cell with pilot pollution problem.
NB Cell Count The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells.
is 3. If the number of neighboring cells with pilot
pollution problem is greater than or equal to
this threshold, the DT point has the pilot
pollution problem.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[0,500) is -95 (unit: dBm). distance between a DT point and the dominant
serving cell is greater than or equal to 0 and is
smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[500,1000) is -95 (unit: dBm). distance between a DT point and the dominant
serving cell is greater than or equal to 500 and
is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[1000,1500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 1000
and is smaller than 1500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[1500,2000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 1500
and is smaller than 2000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[2000,2500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 2000
and is smaller than 2500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[2500,3000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 2500
and is smaller than 3000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[3000,3500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 3000
and is smaller than 3500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[3500,4000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 3500
and is smaller than 4000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[4000,4500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 4000
and is smaller than 4500.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[4500,5000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 4500
and is smaller than 5000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold when the
[5000, ∞) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the dominant
dBm). serving cell is greater than or equal to 5000.
The system obtains the RSCP threshold based
on the distance between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the RSCP of the DT
point is greater than this threshold, it indicates
that the RSCP signal quality of this DT point is
good.
Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). downlink interference problem and the total
number of DT points by Distance Step.
Ec/Io Offset The default value Indicates the threshold of the Ec/Io difference
Threshold is 3 (unit: dB). between a serving cell and an intra-frequency
test cell.
If the Ec/Io difference (absolute value) between
a serving cell and an intra-frequency test cell is
greater than this threshold, the test cell is
considered as a neighboring cell.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
is -105 (unit: When the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
dBm). than this threshold, you need to use the NB
RSCP Threshold and NB Ec/Io Threshold
parameters to make a judgment.
NB Cell RSCP The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -90 (unit: dBm). frequency test cell.
If the RSCP of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the Ec/Io of the test cell is
greater than NB Ec/Io Threshold, the test cell
is considered as a neighboring cell.
NB Cell Ec/Io The default value Indicates the Ec/Io threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -12 (unit: dB). frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the RSCP of the test cell is
greater than NB RSCP Threshold, the test cell
is considered as a neighboring cell.
Coverage The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Extended Radius is 2.5. distance threshold.
Coefficient Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell radius
x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the DT point
is not within the cell coverage distance
threshold, you need to use the RSCP Offset
parameter to make a judgment.
Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with over
is 50 (unit: m). coverage problem and the total number of DT
points by Distance Step.
RSCP Threshold [0,500) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to 0
and is smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.
RSCP Threshold [500,1000) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-95 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to 500
and is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.
RSCP Threshold [5000, ∞) The default value is Indicates the RSCP threshold
-100 (unit: dBm). when the distance between a DT
point and the dominant serving
cell is greater than or equal to
5000.
The system obtains the RSCP
threshold based on the distance
between a DT point and the
dominant serving cell. If the
RSCP of the dominant serving cell
is greater than this threshold, you
need to use the RSCP Difference
parameter to make a judgment.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -115 Weak coverage RSCP threshold.
of Poor Coverage to -25. The Determines weak-coverage-related
default value is conditions when the RSRP value reported
-95 (unit: dBm). by a terminal is less than the threshold.
The ECIO Threshold Value range: -24 Screens out sampling points with poor
of Poor Coverage to 0. The default coverage.
value is -12 (unit:
dB).
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
The Margin Value range: 0 to Threshold for the RSCP difference between
Threshold between 10. The default a serving cell and neighboring cell.
Service Cell's RSCP value is 3 (unit: Determines the conditions related to no
of NCell's dB). serving cell dominance when the RSCP
difference between a serving cell and
neighboring cell is less than the threshold.
The NCell Number Value range: 0 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Threshold of Non 6. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
Main Coverage value is 2. sampling points in a problem area is greater
than or equal to the threshold.
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Minimum receive RSCP. Determines the
of Weak Coverage to -25. The conditions related to overshoot coverage
default value is when the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
-95 (unit: dBm). than the threshold.
The Tiers Threshold Value range: 1 to Specifies the essential condition for
of Over Coverage Cell 5. The default overshoot coverage: The number of tiers
value is 3. between sampling points and the serving
cell must be greater than the threshold.
The count Threshold Value range: 1 to Specifies the threshold for the number of
of Average Station 9. The default sites among all sites under the non-serving
Distance value is 6. cell (the distances between each site and the
serving cell are calculated and sorted in
ascending order). Then the average value is
obtained based on the threshold.
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
The Collection Point Value range: 1 to Determines incorrect coverage when the
Number Threshold of 100. The default number of sampling points of a serving cell
Service Cell value is 20. is greater than or equal to the threshold.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -115 Weak coverage RSCP threshold.
of Weak Coverage to -25. The Determines the conditions related to limited
default value is uplink quality when the RSCP of the
-95 (unit: dBm). serving cell at the sampling point with
limited uplink quality is greater than or
equal to the threshold.
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
The Time Threshold Value range: 5 to Specifies the upper time threshold for
of Continually 30. The default consecutive handovers of
Handover value is 10 (unit: ContinuallyHO_Times_Thd times in the
s). areas where handovers occur frequently.
The Times Threshold Value range: 2 to Specifies the lower threshold for the number
of Continually 10. The default of handovers within
Handover value is 2. ContinuallyHO_Time_Thd in the areas
where handovers occur frequently.
The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 1A/1B/1C event, it is determined
IntraHandover Event value is 0.6 (unit: that there is a handover delay if an intra-
s). frequency handover event is not initiated
within the duration specified by the
threshold.
The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 2A/2B/2C event, it is determined
InterHandover Event value is 0.6 (unit: that there is a handover delay if an inter-
s). frequency handover event is not initiated
within the duration specified by the
threshold.
The Time Threshold Value range: 0.1 Determines handover delays. After a UE
of Untimely to 10. The default reports the 3A event, it is determined that
InterUTRANHandove value is 0.6 (unit: there is a handover delay if an inter-RAT
r Event s). handover event is not initiated within the
duration specified by the threshold.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines a missing neighboring cell.
of Miss Neighbor to -25. The When there is a handover delay, it is
default value is determined that a neighboring cell is a
-95 (unit: dBm). missing neighboring cell when the RSCP of
the neighboring cell is greater than the
threshold but the cell is not configured as
the neighboring cell.
Switch Don't in time Value range: 0.1 Time threshold for delayed inter-frequency
RSCP threshold to 10. The default handovers. A handover does not occur in
value is 0.6 (unit: time if inter-frequency handover events are
s). not triggered after the UE reports the
2A/2B/2C events and after a period
indicated by the threshold.
The difference The default value RSCP difference between the primary
between Active RSCP is 3. serving cell and neighboring cell
and Neighbour RSCP
The Value of Active Value range: -125 Primary serving cell RSCP threshold
RSCP threshold to -25. The
default value is
-105 (unit: dBm).
The Collection Point Value range: The Collection Point Threshold of serving
Threshold of serving more than 20. cell.
cell The default value
is 20.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point1.
1 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-85 (unit: dBm).
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point2.
2 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).
The EcIo Threshold 1 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if the
value is -12 (unit: RSCP of the serving cell is greater than or
dB). equal to the RSCP Threshold 1 of
Interference and Ec/Io is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 1 of Interference.
The EcIo Threshold 2 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if
value is -14 (unit: RSCP is less than the interference RSCP
dB). threshold of the serving cell, and is greater
than or equal to the RSCP Threshold 2 of
Interference, and EcIo is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 2 of Interference.
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point1.
1 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-85 (unit: dBm).
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Determines an interference data point2.
2 of Interference to -25. The
default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).
The EcIo Threshold 1 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if the
value is -12 (unit: RSCP of the serving cell is greater than or
dB). equal to the RSCP Threshold 1 of
Interference and Ec/Io is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 1 of Interference.
The EcIo Threshold 2 Value range: -25 Determines an interference data point. A
of Interference to 0. The default data point is an interference data point if
value is -14 (unit: RSCP is less than the interference RSCP
dB). threshold of the serving cell, and is greater
than or equal to the RSCP Threshold 2 of
Interference, and EcIo is less than or equal
to the EcIo Threshold 2 of Interference.
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 1 to Determines whether the ratio of the problem
Collection Point 100. The default sampling points to the overall consecutive
value is 70 (unit: sampling points in a problem area is greater
%). than or equal to the threshold.
LTE > Coverage Sets the parameters of the LTE Coverage theme.
LTE > InterFerence Sets the parameters of the LTE InterFerence theme.
LTE > Abnormal Event Sets the parameters of the LTE Abnormal Event theme.
In the Abnormal Event dialog box of the Theme tab page,
click Custom Event to add user-defined events.
LTE > Throughput Sets the parameters of the LTE Throughput theme.
Coverage Extended The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Radius Coefficient is 2.5. distance threshold.
Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
radius x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT
point and the dominant serving cell. If the
DT point is not within the cell coverage
distance threshold, the Assistant uses the
RSRP Offset parameter to make a
judgment.
Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). over coverage problem and the total number
of DT points by Distance Step.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[0,500) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 0 and is smaller than 500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[500,1000) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 500 and is smaller than 1000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[1000,1500) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 1000 and is smaller than 1500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[1500,2000) is -95 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 1500 and is smaller than 2000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[2000,2500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 2000 and is smaller than 2500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[2500,3000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 2500 and is smaller than 3000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[3000,3500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 3000 and is smaller than 3500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[3500,4000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 3500 and is smaller than 4000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[4000,4500) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 4000 and is smaller than 4500.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[4500,5000) is -100 (unit: distance between a DT point and the
dBm). dominant serving cell is greater than or
equal to 4500 and is smaller than 5000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold when the
[5000,∞) is -100 (unit: distance between a sampling point and the
dBm). serving cell dominance is greater than or
equal to 5000.
The system obtains the RSRP threshold
based on the distance between a DT point
and the dominant serving cell. If the RSRP
of the dominant serving cell is greater than
this threshold, the Assistant uses the RSRP
Difference parameter to make a judgment.
NB Cell Count The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells.
is 3. If the number of neighboring cells with
interference problem of a DT point is
greater than or equal to this threshold, the
DT point is considered as the DT point with
no serving cell dominance problem.
Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with no
is 50 (unit: m). serving cell problem and the total number of
DT points by Distance Step.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold for a DT
is -100 (unit: point.
dBm). This parameter is used to determine whether
a DT point is valid. If the RSRP of a service
cell exceeds the threshold, the DT point is
valid. Otherwise, neglect the DT point to
prevent incorrect judgment caused by weak
coverage.
DT Point Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold for the number of
is 10. DT points in a service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
number of DT points in a service cell is less
than the threshold, DT points are
insufficient and the analysis of antenna
feeder faults is not required.
Serving Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 50. points in the coverage area of a service cell
to all DT points in the service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
ratio of DT points in the coverage area of a
service cell to all DT points in the service
cell is less than the threshold, the antenna
feeder may be faulty.
Neighbor Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 70. points in the coverage area of a service cell
under the same BTS to all DT points in the
service cell.
This parameter is used to determine whether
the antenna feeder for a cell is faulty. If the
ratio of DT points in the coverage area of a
service cell under the same BTS to all DT
points in the service cell is less than the
threshold, the antenna feeder may be faulty.
Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. When the RSRP value reported by a
dBm). UE is less than this threshold, the Assistant
determines whether weak coverage exists in
the serving cell.
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
Average inter-site The default value Indicates the average distance between sites.
distance is 2000.
The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.
Latterly Cell RSRP The default value RSRP threshold for the cell closest to a
Threshold is -100. sampling point.
The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Threshold for the number of sites among all
of Average inter-site Value range: sites under the non-serving cell (the
dist integers greater distances between each site and the serving
than or equal to 1. cell are calculated and sorted in ascending
order). Then, the average inter-site distance
is obtained based on the threshold.
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
The Tiers Threshold Default value: 3. Indicates the mandatory condition for
of Over Coverage Cell Value range: 1 to overshoot coverage. The number of tiers
6. between a sampling point and the serving
cell is greater than or equal to this threshold.
Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold. If the RSRP
is -100 (unit: values of the serving cell and its
dBm). neighboring cells are greater than this
threshold, the no-serving-cell-dominance
conditions are met.
RSRP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold for the RSRP
is 3 (unit: dB). difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells. If the RSRP difference
between the serving cell and its neighboring
cells is less than this threshold, the no-
serving-cell-dominance conditions are met.
Calculation Cell Num The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells in
is 2. which the RSRP value is less than the RSRP
difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells.
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
The distance between The default value Indicates the distance between UE and site.
UE and site is 2000.
Serving Ration The default value Indicates the threshold for the ratio of DT
Threshold is 40 (unit: %). points in the coverage area of a service cell
to all DT points in the service cell.
This parameter is used as a condition to
determine whether wrong coverage exists. If
the ratio of DT points in the coverage area
of a service cell to all DT points in the
service cell is less than the threshold, the
problem may exist.
Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. If the value reported by the terminal is
dBm). less than the threshold, this parameter is
used as a condition to determine whether the
weak coverage exists.
PCC PUCCH Power The default value Indicates the uplink transmit power.
is 10 (unit: dBm).
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.
The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.
RSRP Threshold The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold. If the RSRP
is -100 (unit: values of the serving cell and its
dBm). neighboring cells are both greater than this
threshold, this condition is met.
RSRP Difference The default value Indicates the threshold for the RSRP
Threshold is 6 (unit: dB). difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells. If the RSRP difference
between the serving cell and its neighboring
cells is less than this threshold, this
condition is met.
Calculation Cell Num The default value Indicates the number of neighboring cells in
is 3. which the RSRP value is less than the RSRP
difference between the serving cell and its
neighboring cells.
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
Average inter-site The default value Indicates the distance of the inter-site.
distance is 2000.
The Count Threshold Default value: 6. Sort the cells according to the distance
of Average inter-site Value range: between the serving cell site and all sites
dist integers greater (from near to far). Select the cell number
than or equal to 1. specified by this threshold and obtain the
average inter-site distance.
The RSRP Threshold Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP threshold of LTE weak
of LTE Weak to -43. The coverage.
Coverage default value is
-110 (unit: dBm).
The Proportion of Iffy Value range: 10 Indicates the proportion of Iffy collection
Collection Point to 100. The point.
default value is
60 (unit: %).
The RSCP Threshold Value range: -125 Indicates the RSCP threshold of LTE-to-
of LTE-to- to -25. The UMTSiRAT neighbor cell.
UMTSiRAT neighbor default value is
cell -95 (unit: dBm).
The RSSI Threshold Value range: -110 Indicates the RxLev threshold of L2G iRAT
of L2G iRAT to -47. The neighbor cell.
neighbor cell default value is
-95 (unit: dBm).
The Time Threshold The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
of Continually is 10 (unit: s).
Handover
The Times Threshold The default value Indicates the maximum number of
of Continually is -2. handovers allowed in a week.
Handover
ThemeAttr LTE HO The default value Indicates the user-defined period for
Delay HO Period is 100 (unit: ms). reporting an event.
ThemeAttr LTE HO The default value Indicates the signal level threshold for a
Delay HO RSRP is -100 (unit: handover.
dBm).
Serving Cell RSRP The default value Indicates the RSRP threshold of a serving
Threshold is -100 (unit: cell. When the RSRP value reported by a
dBm). UE is less than this threshold, this condition
is used to determine whether interference
exists.
Serving Cell SINR The default value Indicates the SINR threshold of the serving
Threshold is 6 (unit: dBm). cell. When the SINR value reported by a UE
is less than this threshold, this condition is
used to determine whether interference
exists.
Sliding Window Size The default value Indicates the size of the sliding window.
is 10. The unit is the number of points.
Calculation Window The default value Indicates the size of the calculation window.
Size is 7. The unit is the number of points.
Point Interval The default value Indicates the number of interval points.
is 2.
GEN VoLTE VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice call completion rate
Access Fail The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
Parameters in the Access Fail dialog box
(GEN VoLTE).
VoLTE Theme > Save path for VoLTE theme analysis reports
Report Setting You can click Browse... after selecting the
check box before Report to set the report save
path. After the analysis is complete, you can
open the report to view analysis results.
ROMES VoLTE VoLTE Theme > VoLTE voice call completion rate
Access Fail The parameters to be configured vary
according to theme types. For details, see
VoLTE Theme >
Parameters in the VoLTE Theme Setting
Call Drop
dialog box (ROMES VoLTE) .
VoLTE Theme >
MOS
VoLTE Theme > Save path for VoLTE theme analysis reports
Report Setting You can click Browse... after selecting the
check box before Report to set the report save
path. After the analysis is complete, you can
open the report to view analysis results.
Common
TCALL Time Value range: 1 to Indicates the TCALL time. This parameter
60 (unit: s). The is displayed when the value of
default value is TCALL_Active is True.
10.
TQOS Time Value range: 1 to Indicates the TQOS time. This parameter is
60 (unit: s). The displayed when the value of TQOS_Active
default value is 6. is True.
Common
Common
Latency_Thd_Idle Value range: 0.00 Indicates the access delay threshold in idle
to 15.00 (unit: s). mode (MTC).
The default value
is 3.50.
Common
Common
RSRP estimate The values are as Indicates the RSRP evaluation switch.
follows: True indicates enabled and False indicates
l True disabled.
l False
The default value
is True.
Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during access.
s). The
default value
is 5.
End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during access.
s). The
default value
is 5.
Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during a call.
s). The
default value
is 5.
End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during a call.
s). The
default value
is 5.
MOS RF Range
Start Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: start time point during MOS
s). The analysis.
default value
is 5.
End Range Limit Value range: Indicates the increment for the
0 to 99 (unit: end time point during MOS
s). The analysis.
default value
is 1.
Parameter Description
TD-SCDMA > Neighbor Sets the parameters of the missing TD-SCDMA neighboring
Cell Analysis cell theme.
The parameters vary according to the analysis type. For
details, see Neighbor Cell Analysis parameter description.
Coverage Extended The default value Indicates the coefficient of the cell coverage
Radius Coefficient is 2.5. distance threshold.
Cell coverage distance threshold = Cell
radius x Value of this parameter
You need to check whether a DT point is
within the cell coverage distance threshold
according to the distance between the DT
point and the dominant serving cell. If the
DT point is not within the cell coverage
distance threshold, the Assistant uses the
RSRP Offset parameter to make a
judgment.
Distance Step The default value Measures the number of DT points with
is 50 (unit: m). coverage overlap problems and the total
number of DT points by Distance Step.
Ec/Io Diff Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the Ec/Io
is 3 (unit: dB). difference between a serving cell and an
intra-frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io difference (absolute value)
between a serving cell and an intra-
frequency test cell is greater than this
threshold, the test cell is considered as a
neighboring cell.
RSCP Threshold The default value Indicates the threshold of the RSCP.
is -105 (unit: When the RSCP of a serving cell is greater
dBm). than this threshold, you need to use the NB
RSCP Threshold and NB Ec/Io
Threshold parameters to make a judgment.
NB Cell RSCP The default value Indicates the RSCP threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -90 (unit: dBm). frequency test cell.
If the RSCP of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the Ec/Io of the test cell is
greater than NB Ec/Io Threshold, the test
cell is considered as a neighboring cell.
NB Cell Ec/Io The default value Indicates the Ec/Io threshold of an inter-
Threshold is -12 (unit: dB). frequency test cell.
If the Ec/Io of a test cell is greater than this
threshold and the RSCP of the test cell is
greater than NB RSCP Threshold, the test
cell is considered as a neighboring cell.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Cell Indicates the information of a cell. The tool analyzes a cell in the DT
logs and displays only information of this cell.
Click the Cell column. The Cell dialog box is displayed. Select
Network and the corresponding cell information.
> Enables you to move one or multiple logfiles from the left area to the
right area.
>> Enables you to move all logfiles from the left area to the right area.
< Enables you to move one or multiple logfiles from the right area to the
left area.
<< Enables you to move all logfiles from the right area to the left area.
Area Description
(2) Displays the event information about the selected KPI in area (1).
(3) Displays the formula for calculating the selected KPI in area (1).
(4) Displays the values of calculation factors in area (3). For details, see
Table 19-16.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
CPICH Ec/Io Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip of the common
pilot channel to the total power density of the received
bandwidth.
CPICH RSCP Indicates the code power of the received signal of the
common pilot channel.
Parameter Description
CRC ERROR Indicates the number of the received CRC errors within a
statistical period.
Properties area Displays the over-coverage threshold information. You can modify
the value of a parameter when configuring the theme analysis type.
Threshold area Displays the poor-coverage threshold information. You can modify
the value of the parameter when configuring the theme analysis
type.
Parameter Description
Threshold area Displays the information about the azimuth garbled threshold. You
can modify the value of a parameter when configuring the theme
analysis type.
Alarm Indicates the alarm threshold for the azimuth garbled rate.
RxLev Diff(dBm) Indicates the threshold of the received level difference between the
current serving cell and the neighboring cell.
RxLev(dBm) Indicates the received level threshold for the current serving cell.
Neighbor cell Indicates the threshold for the number of neighboring cells whose
Count RxLev Diff(dBm) is smaller than the specified value.
Parameter Description
((1st - 2nd)RSCP < ((1st - 2nd)RSCP < Threshold)Count is counted when both of
Threshold)Count the following conditions are met: (1) The distance between the
DT point and the serving cell is shorter than the cell coverage
threshold. (2) The difference between the RSCP of the serving
cell and the RSCP of the neighboring cell with the strongest
signal strength is smaller than the RSCP offset.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
((1st - 2nd)RSCP < Indicates the number of DT points. The distance between the DT
Threshold) Count point and the primary serving cell is shorter than Distance
Threshold (m), and the difference between the RSCP of the
primary cell at the DT point and the RSCP of the strongest
neighboring cell is lower than RSCP Offset.
No Serving Cell Count Indicates the DT points with no primary serving cells.
No Serving Cell Indicates the rate that no primary serving cell is covering the DT
Rate(%) point.
No Serving Cell Rate(%) = Number of DT points that have no
primary serving cells/Total number of DT points.
Chart area Displays the DT points with no primary serving cell in charts,
where:
l The horizontal coordinate indicates the distance range.
l The vertical coordinate indicates the number of DT points.
l The red points indicate the abnormal DT points in the
distance range.
File List Indicates the DT logfile list, that is, the list of DT
logfiles related to the serving cell of the DT point.
Parameter Description
NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has the neighboring relationship with the cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.
SC Best Number of pilot pollution DT points with the strongest RSCP in the
cell whose analysis results are drilled down.
SCN Number of pilot pollution DT points with the N strongest RSCP in the
cell whose analysis results are drilled down.
The value of N can be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
SC≥7 Number of pilot pollution DT points with the RSCP values equal to
or greater than 7 in the RSCP rank statistics for a cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.
SC≥2 Number of pilot pollution DT points with the RSCP values equal to
or greater than 2 in the RSCP rank statistics for a cell whose analysis
results are drilled down.
PP All Total number of pilot pollution DT points. That is, the parameter
value is the sum of the value of SC Best, SC2-6 and SC≥7.
High RSCP High Number of DT points with high RSCP value (RSCP value >
Ec/Io Count RSCP threshold) and high Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value > Ec/Io
threshold).
High RSCP Low Ec/Io Number of DT points with high RSCP value (RSCP value >
Count RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value < Ec/Io
threshold). The Assistant performs interference analysis on such
DT points.
Low RSCP Low Ec/Io Number of DT points with low RSCP value (RSCP value <
Count RSCP threshold) and low Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value < Ec/Io
threshold).
Low RSCP High Ec/Io Number of DT points with low RSCP value (RSCP value <
Count RSCP threshold) and high Ec/Io value (Ec/Io value > Ec/Io
threshold).
Missing Intra-Frequency Number of missing neighboring cells in the case that the
Neighboring Cell Count missing neighboring cells have the same frequency with
the serving cell.
Parameter Description
Missing Inter-Frequency Number of missing neighboring cells in the case that the
Neighboring Cell Count missing neighboring cells do not have the same
frequency with the serving cell.
File List DT logfile list that lists the DT logfiles of cells that
provide services for DT points.
NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has neighboring relation with the cell whose analysis results are
drilled down.
NOTE
A neighboring cell refers to a cell that has neighboring relation with the cell whose analysis results are
drilled down.
System drop-down list Enables you to select the system that a KPI belongs to.
Data Type l Integer: The KPI data Indicates the data type of a
type is integer. KPI.
l Float: The KPI data type
is float.
The default value is Float.
Parameter Description
<, <=, >, >=, ==, and != Indicates the comparison signs in the
calculation expression that is used for
comparing two elements.
Common Functions
Function Function Description Example Example
Type Name Description
ARRAY - - -
cells with
pilot
pollution
Name Description
Title Indicates the text information entered in the report, including the title
and body text.
Parameter Description
Font Enables you to set the font, typeface, size, color, and effect of
characters.
By default, Font is set to Times New Roman, Typeface is set to
Regular, Size is set to Little Four, and Color is set to Black.
Align Indicates the alignment mode. You can select an alignment mode from
the drop-down list. Currently, the following alignment modes are
available:
l Right: indicates that the words are right-aligned in the .doc file.
l Center: indicates that the words are center-aligned in the .doc file.
l Left: indicates that the words are left-aligned in the .doc file.
By default, the parameter is set to Left.
KPI Name Indicates the name of a KPI. For details about the KPIs, see 21.3 C
Description of Predefined KPIs.
The left box lists all the predefined KPIs, and the right box lists the
KPIs to be displayed in the report.
NOTE
Currently, the left box lists only the predefined KPIs and cannot display the
custom KPIs.
> Enables you to add one or multiple KPIs selected from the left box to
the right box.
>> Enables you to add all the KPIs displayed in the left box to the right
box.
< Enables you to remove one or multiple KPIs from the right box.
<< Enables you to remove all the KPIs displayed in the right box.
IE Dialog Box
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Log File area Index Displays the serial number of the log file in the
table.
Export Path area Browse Enables you to select a path to save exported files.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
<, <=, >, >=, ==, != Indicates the comparison signs in the
calculation expression that is used for
comparing two elements.
Name Description
Basic Information
Parameter Description
Common Functions
Function Function Description Example Example
Type Name Description
ARRAY - - -
cells with
pilot
pollution
Name Description
System Current system. The ALL: indicates all custom delays in the
current system.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
2. Click .
3. Add events or signaling
messages.
NOTE
Exclude indicates that a delay
is measured when an event or
a signaling message does not
exist between the added start
signaling (start event) and end
signaling (end event).
2. Click .
3. Add events or signaling
messages.
NOTE
Include indicates that a delay
is measured when an event or
a signaling message exists
between the added start
signaling (start event) and end
signaling (end event).
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Table 19-21 Description of parameters in the Automatic Analysis Setting dialog box
Parameter Description
Times Indicates the number of times that the automatic import is performed.
The Assistant performs an automatic import when Start time arrives.
This parameter is valid when Mode is set to Time mode.
Parameter Description
Parameter Description
Process Indicates the progress of the existing automatic analysis task for
analyzing the logfile.
IE Name Description
Serving Cells Line Color Enables you to set the color of lines
connecting DT points to the serving
cells.
Neighbor Cells Line Style Enables you to set the style of lines
connecting DT points to the serving
cells.
Parameter Description
Grid Size Fixed Setting Enables you to set the grid size.
Field Set the radio parameter values to be displayed on the map track
of IEs.
The IE Name, IE Value, Latitude, and Longitude parameters
are displayed by default. After importing engineering
parameters, you may select the engineering parameters to be
displayed on the map track of IEs.
Save Setting Save Path Click Browse and select a path to save exported
reports.
DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Elevator room, basement, or parking lot
– Floor
– Outdoor
l LogFile: Select data from the drop-down list.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.
DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Frequency not lock
– Frequency lock
l LogFile: Select data.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.
DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Name: Enter a name.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Elevator and floor
– Entry and exit of buildings
– Cells in buildings
– Entry and exit of parking lots or
basements
l LogFile: Select a type from the following
list:
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.
DT Test Setting AddFile Click AddFile. The Add Indoor Test File.
dialog box is displayed.
l Cell Name: Select a cell name from the drop-
down list.
l TestPalce: Select a far point, middle point, or
close point from the drop-down list.
l Type
Select a type from the following list:
– Upload
– Download
l Channel: Select a single-channel or a dual-
channel.
l PCI: Enter a PCI.
l LogFile: Select data.
l ImagePath: Click Add Image and select an
image.
Parameter Description
20 FAQs
This describes the FAQs, analyzes their causes, and provides the solutions. This also describes
the skills for using the Assistant.
20.1 How Do I Uninstall the Main Program of the Assistant?
20.2 How Do I Import Configuration Information
This section describes how to import configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.
20.3 How Do I Export Configuration Information
This section describes how to export configuration information. If the Assistant installed on
two PCs has the same configuration information, such as the settings of the theme analysis
type and report template, you can export the configuration information from one PC to the
other PC. This improves the analysis efficiency.
20.4 What Should I Do to Troubleshoot the Failure of Starting the Assistant After the
Microsoft Office Software Is Uninstalled?
This describes how to troubleshoot the failure of starting the Assistant after the Microsoft
Office software is uninstalled.
20.5 How to Prepare an Engineering Parameter File?
The Assistant allows you to import the engineering parameter file in .xls format or .csv
format. Before importing the file, you need to manually match the required fields and optional
fields. To avoid repeating operations, you are advised to check and modify the engineering
parameter file to be imported so that its fields are consistent with those in the Assistant
database.
20.6 What Should I Do When No Theme Analysis Result Is Displayed?
This section describes the causes of the problem that no theme analysis result is displayed and
provides the corresponding solutions.
20.7 What Should I Do When the Map View Is Displayed in Red During the Drilldown and
Data View Synchronization?
This provides the cause and solution of the problem that the map view is displayed in red
during the drilldown and data view synchronization.
20.8 What Should I Do to Solve the Common Problems in Automatic Analysis Tasks?
This describes the common problems in automatic analysis tasks. This also describes the
causes of these problems and provides the corresponding solutions.
20.9 What Should I Do When IEs Fail to Be Displayed on a Map in the Further Analysis
Report in Quick Analysis Mode?
This section describes the problem that IEs fail to be displayed on a map in quick analysis
mode and the corresponding solution.
20.10 How to Handle the Problem of Abnormal Breakdown of the Assistant When Moving a
Legend on the Map?
This section describes the cause of the problem that the Assistant breaks down abnormally
when you move a legend on the map and provides the corresponding solution.
20.11 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?
This section describes the cause of the problem that the message Error: ESN is not correct!
is displayed when the license edition of the Assistant is used. It also provides the
corresponding solution.
20.12 What Should I Do When the Assistant Fails to Start the Google Earth?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant fails to start the Google Earth and the
corresponding solution.
20.13 How to View Segmentation Points of DT Logs?
20.14 How Do I Resolve the Problem that an Error Message Is Displayed When an Excel
Report Is Exported?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that an error message is displayed when an
Excel report is exported.
20.15 How Do I Resolve the Problem that the Assistant Window Is Displayed in the Front but
Other Windows Cannot Be Displayed?
This section describes the problem that the Assistant window is displayed in the front but
other windows cannot be displayed.
20.16 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Selected Data Points Cannot Be Highlighted When
a Multi-selection Tool on a Map Is Used to Select IEs?
This section describes how to resolve the problem that selected data points cannot be
highlighted and the solution to the problem when a multi-selection tool (rectangle, circle, or
polygon) on a map is used to select IEs.
20.17 How Do I Resolve the Problem that Assistant Icons Are Displayed as Garbled
Characters?
This section describes the cause of the problem that Assistant icons are displayed as garbled
characters and how to resolve the problem.
20.18 How Do I Solve the Compatibility Problem Between the Project of an Earlier Version
and the Assistant?
This section describes how to solve the compatibility problem between the project of an
earlier version and the Assistant.
20.19 What Do I Do If the Manually Calculated KPIs Are Slightly Different from Those
Displayed on the Assistant?
For the KPIs involving IEs, the values displayed on the IE page may be slightly different from
the manually calculated values.
20.20 What Do I Do If the Volumes of Data Related to RF Modes Are Different Before and
After Parsing?
20.21 What do I do if one time repeately appear when using Time Binning way to analyze
data and display the IEs?
20.22 If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be Displayed in
the IE Tree
Answer
1. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Suite > Assistant V300R018 > Uninstall.
The window for uninstalling the Assistant is displayed.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Next.
4. In the displayed Confirm dialog box, click Yes.
5. When the uninstallation is complete, click Finish.
Context
The imported configuration information will overwrite the existing configuration information.
The Assistant allows you to import the following configuration information:
l Information about the configured KPI template, IE template, and report template,
including:
– Predefined KPIs and user-defined KPIs
– Predefined IEs and user-defined IEs
– Predefined report template, benchmark report template, single site verification
report template, and user-defined report template
l Legend configuration information
l Setting of the theme analysis type
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Tool > Import on the toolbar.
A message is displayed, asking you whether to restart the Assistant after the new
configuration information is applied.
– Click Yes to continue importing the configuration information. The Assistant will
close after applying the new configuration information.
– Click No to cancel the import of configuration information. No further action is
required.
2. Click Yes. In the Open dialog box, select a file to be imported.
3. Click Open.
The system prompts that data in the imported file will overwrite the existing
configuration information.
A message is displayed, asking you whether to restart the Assistant after the new
configuration information is applied.
– Click Yes. The Assistant will close after applying the new configuration
information.
– Click No to cancel the import of configuration information.
2. Click Yes. In the Open dialog box, select a file to be imported.
3. Click Open.
4. In the displayed Import Dialog dialog box, select the configuration information to be
imported.
5. Click OK to import the configuration information.
If you want to cancel the import, click Cancel.
After the configuration information is imported successfully, the Assistant automatically
closes. Restart the Assistant to make the imported configuration information take effect.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the configuration information is imported successfully, you can perform task analysis
based on the imported system configuration.
Context
The Assistant allows you to export the following configuration information:
l Information about the configured KPI template, IE template, and report template,
including:
– Predefined KPIs and user-defined KPIs comprise a whole KPI set and are not
related to settings on the project setting GUI.
– Predefined IEs and user-defined IEs
– Predefined report template, benchmark report template, single site verification
report template, and user-defined report template
l Legend configuration information
l Setting of the theme analysis type
Procedure
Step 1 Choose Tool > Export on the toolbar.
Step 3 Click Save. After the import is complete, the system displays a message, indicating that the
configuration information is exported successfully.
----End
Symptom
When you starts the Assistant, the system displays a message indicating that the Microsoft
Office software is not installed. Then, the Assistant fails to be started.
Cause
Normal operation of the Assistant software depends on the Office Web Components (OWC)
10, which is installed with the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office software.
If you uninstall the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office software, or upgrade
the Microsoft Office software, the OWC10 component is also uninstalled. Then, the Assistant
software functions abnormally.
Solution
Reinstall the GENEX Shared components or the Microsoft Office 2003 or 2007.
Context
The engineering parameter file must contain specific parameters to be imported into the
Assistant for analysis. The levels of parameters are different from each other, for example:
l Required field: It must exist and match the field in the Assistant database.
l Optional field: Regardless of whether the optional field is matched, the engineering
parameter file can be imported into the Assistant for analysis.
Table 20-1, Table 20-2, Table 20-3, Table 20-4 and Table 20-5 lists the level of each
parameter of the GSM engineering, WCDMA engineering, CDMA engineering, TD-SCDMA
engineering, and LTE engineering parameter in the Assistant.`
Required field Azimuth, CI, BCCH, Longitude, Latitude, LAC, BTS ID, Site Name
Level Field
Optional field Cell Name, CGI, TCH, BSIC, GPRS Support, Frequency Band,
EDGE Support, Hopping Mode, BSC Name, Project Phase, RAC,
MA, Site Type, BTS Type, Antenna, City, Region, Height,
Mechanical Downtilt, Electrical Downtilt, Altitude, Polarization,
Antenna Gain, H-Beamwidth, V-Beamwidth, Cell Radius, Cell Type,
Active, Scene, TMA Type, TMA Gain, NCellN
Required field CI, ARFCN, PSC, Longitude, Latitude, Azimuth, NodeB ID, NodeB
Name
Optional field RNC ID, RAC, LAC, NodeB Type, Sector ID, Cell Name,
DownTilt, Electrical Downtilt, Mechanical
Downtilt,Height,Altitude, Antenna, Antenna Gain, H-Beamwidth, V-
Beamwidth, Feeder Type, Feeder Length(DL), NodeBCE, Cell Type,
Cell Radius, Active, Scene, TMA
Required field PN, Longitude, Latitude, Azimuth, Cell ID, ARFCN, Sector ID
Optional field DownTilt, Site ID, Site Name, Carrier ID, SID, NID, Antenna
Height, BeamWidth, Area
Required field Longitude, Latitude, eNodeB ID, eNodeB Name, Sector ID, Local
Cell ID, Cell ID, DLEARFCN, PCI, Azimuth, Cell Name
Procedure
You can prepare an engineering parameter file by using either of the following method: (1)
Create an .xls file, which must contain the required field. Figure 20-1 shows an instance of
the created .xls file.
(2) Choose Tools > Export BTS Information Template > GSM on the main menu of the
Assistant to download the GSM engineering parameter template and then fill the engineering
parameter information in this template.
Symptom
After related configuration items are set, you choose View > GSM Theme Result to view
GSM theme results, but no theme analysis result is displayed in the GSM Theme Result
window.
Symptom
The map view is displayed in red during the drilldown and data view synchronization.
Cause
The font used by the AssistantV3 and GENEX Assistant does not exist in Microsoft
Windows or cannot be displayed.
Solution
Check whether the font used by the AssistantV3 and GENEX Assistant exists in Microsoft
Windows and can be displayed normally. If the font does not exist or cannot be displayed,
reinstall the GENEX Assistant. After the installation, restart the PC.
The System Does Not Detect All the Logfiles in the Monitoring Directory
l Symptom:
The system fails to detect the logfiles that are added to the monitoring directory.
l Cause I and solution:
This failure occurs because you do not click to start an automatic analysis task.
Click to start an automatic analysis task. The system starts detecting logfiles.
l Cause II and solution:
The setting in Monitor path is inconsistent with the actual directory where the logfiles
are saved.
Check and ensure that the setting in Monitor path is consistent with the actual directory
where the logfiles are saved.
The System Can Detect Logfiles Normally but Fails to Import Them
l Symptom:
The system can detect logfiles normally but fails to import them. Status is in the waiting
status for 30 seconds.
l Cause I and solution:
The OK.txt file does not exist in the logfile folder to be analyzed.
Add the OK.txt file to the logfile folder to be analyzed, and then trigger the import of
logfiles. The system starts parsing and importing the logfiles.
l Cause II and solution:
The system is performing another automatic analysis task and does not start importing
the logfiles in the monitoring directory.
Wait until the previous automatic analysis task is complete.
All the projects in the workspace do not meet the requirements for an automatic analysis
task. If you have manually analyzed a project, the project does not support the automatic
analysis any more.
l Solution:
Create a project and ensure that this project is not manually analyzed.
Failed to Stop the Automatic Analysis Task by Clicking the Button for Stopping
A Task
l Symptom:
Problem Description
In the case that an analysis group is created for a project in quick analysis mode, if the created
analysis group contains the DT logfiles that are already analyzed for other analysis groups, the
IE information contained in these logfiles cannot be displayed on the map in the generated
analysis report.
Possible Cause
In quick analysis mode, if the analysis group created for a project contains DT logfiles that are
already analyzed for other analysis groups, the Assistant cannot read the detailed IE
information contained in these analyzed DT logfiles. As a result, these IEs fail to be displayed
on the map.
Handling Procedure
Operate the created project in traditional analysis mode.
Symptom
The Assistant breaks down abnormally when you move a legend on the map.
Solution
Check whether the screen word-capturing function of the Kingsoft Powerword program is
enabled. If the screen word-capturing function is enabled, disable this function.
Symptom
When the license edition of the Assistant is used, the message Error: ESN is not correct! is
displayed and the Assistant cannot be started properly.
Cause
The ESN changes and cannot match the license.
Solution
Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC.The
Assistant cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration. In
this case, the Assistant selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If
multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the
operating system is started. therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the
number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not correct! is
displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again.
Problem Description
After the Google Earth is installed by running googleupdatesetup.exe in the case that the PC
is connected to the Internet, the Assistant is started but the functions of the Google Earth
cannot be used.
Possible Cause
The version of the Google Earth installed through googleupdatesetup.exe is inconsistent with
the version of the Google Earth used by the Assistant.
Handling Procedure
Use the installation program of the specified version of the Google Earth. The specified
version is 7.1.2.2041 and the installation program is
GoogleEarthWin-7.1.2.2041.1417763245.exe.
Answer
1. Import DT logs.
2. Run the analysis task.
3. On the Project tab page, double-click the Common node.
4. View the segmentation points of DT logs.
– Right-click FileID and choose Display On Map from the shortcut menu. The
segmentation points of DT logs are displayed on a map, as shown in Figure 20-2.
– Right-click FileID and choose Display On Sheet from the shortcut menu. The
segmentation points of DT logs are displayed in a sheet.
Symptom
During Excel report export, an error message is displayed, indicating that a server exception
occurs.
Root Cause
The Excel process is terminated unexpectedly during Excel report export. As a result, Excel
invoking fails.
Solution
During report export, do not open the report that is being exported. If server exceptions occur,
re-import reports.
Symptom
When the Assistant is running, the Assistant window is always displayed on the top. As a
result, other windows cannot be displayed.
Root Cause
A large number of system resources are occupied when the Assistant is running for a long
time. As a result, other windows cannot obtain required resources and cannot be displayed on
the top.
Solution
Minimize the Assistant to view other windows.
Symptom
The data points that are not in the selected status exist in selected data when a multi-selection
tool on a map is used to select IEs.
Root Cause
The third-party control, MAPX, used by the Assistant does not support highlighted display of
multiple data points of the same longitude and latitude.
Solution
Use a single-selection tool and press Ctrl to select and highlight multiple data points of the
same longitude and latitude.
Symptom
On the Assistant, choose Report > Report Template to open the GUI. Then, close the GUI.
Assistant icons are displayed as garbled characters, as shown in the following figure.
Root Cause
The problem is caused by the third-party control used by the Assistant.
Solution
Restart the Assistant without interrupting use of functions. After the restart, Assistant icons
become normal.
Symptom
When using the Assistant of the later version to open the project of an earlier version, you can
check counters or perform other operations, but some counters may be incompletely analyzed.
Cause
After you use the Assistant of the later version to open the project of an earlier version,
modify the project setting, and perform the analysis again, the database structures of the
earlier and later versions are changed. As a result, some counters are incompletely analyzed.
Solution
Do not import projects of earlier versions to the Assistant of the later version. Re-create a
project on the Assistant of the later version for analysis.
Symptom
The KPI values displayed on the IE page is slightly different from the manually calculated
values.
Root Cause
l Precision reason
When KPI values are calculated, the displayed values are slightly different from those
displayed on the Assistant due to the IE precision reason.
l The time mechanisms used by events and KPIs are different.
The start time and end time used for manual calculations are different from the time used
by the Assistant. As a result, the manually calculated values and the values displayed on
the Assistant are slightly different.
The slight difference is normal and the KPI display on the Assistant is correct.
Handling Method
You do not need to take measures.
Symptom
The volumes of data related to RF Modes are different before and after parsing. This is
normal.
Root Cause
When the data related to RF Mode is parsed on the Assistant, KPI calculations are required.
As a result, the volumes of parsed data are different between the Probe and Assistant, and
sometimes the difference is great.
Handling Method
You do not need to take measures.
Symptom
When you use Time Binning way to analyze the DT data and display the IEs, the same time
maybe displayed in different records, which appears occasionally.
Root Cause
The longitude and latitude are not analyzed in the Time Binning way.
Handling Method
You are advised to use the No Binning way.
If the IEs Under the Delay Node Have No Value, They Still Need to Be
Displayed in the IE Tree
The Interrupt Time Delay node is used as an example, as shown in Figure 20-3.
LTE to GSM interrupt Time Delay(RLC DL)(ms) has no value, and it is displayed on the
IE tree on the left.
21 Appendixes
21.1 IE Descriptions
This section describes all the MS IEs and scanner IEs on all networks (These IEs are
displayed by the Assistant). You can refer to this section when viewing corresponding IEs in a
view window.
21.2 B Description of Predefined Events
This section describes the predefined events in the networks. You can refer to this section
when setting event parameters.
21.3 C Description of Predefined KPIs
This describes the system predefined KPIs of the networks. You can refer to this part when
viewing the detailed meanings of KPIs.
21.4 D Description of Predefined Reports
This section describes the predefined reports. You can refer to this section for information
about system report templates. The report can be in Excel or Word format, and the available
report types include BenchMark, Cluster, and SSV.
21.5 Description of Shortcut Keys
This section describes some shortcut keys of the Assistant.
21.1 IE Descriptions
This section describes all the MS IEs and scanner IEs on all networks (These IEs are
displayed by the Assistant). You can refer to this section when viewing corresponding IEs in a
view window.
NOTE
Only No Binning is supported when the consistency of IEs on the Probe and that on the Assistant is
checked, because the Binning algorithm of the Probe differs from that of the Assistant.
The delays involving secondary calculations of data export are displayed under the Delay node in the IE
navigation tree even if there is no delay value.
Common
FTP Test FTP Type - Indicates the FTP test type, such as FTP
Upload and FTP Download.
FTP Real Time Time unit: second Indicates the FTP test duration.
FTP Real Time Size unit: bit Indicates the FTP download or upload data
size.
FTP Real Time unit: second Indicates the FTP test completion duration.
Complete
Baidu NetDisk unit: kbit/s Indicates the upload throughput of the Baidu
Throughput UL NetDisk.
Delay
Session Setup Time Unit: millisecond Indicates the setup delay of a session.
Delay The setup delay of a session indicates the
interval between the RAS Dial Attempt
event and the Session Start event.
Ping RTT at Unit: millisecond Indicates the round trip time (RTT) delay in
Application Level the ping test.
Attach Time Delay Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about delay time from
Attach request to Attach success
Detach Time Delay Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about delay time from
Detach request to Detach success
PDP Activation Unit: millisecond Indicates the statistics about GSM PDP
Time Delay activation delay time.
PDP activation delay time = Time when the
Activate PDP Context Accept message is
received - Time when the Activate PDP
Context Request message is sent
LTE to GSM CSFB Unit: millisecond Indicates the LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
Time(MOC+MTC) delay.
LTE to GSM CSFB Time = Delay from
LTECSFBToGSMServiceRequest to
LTECSFBToGSMServiceSuc.
GSM CS Call Setup Unit: millisecond Indicates the GSM MOC and MTC call
Time(MOC+MTC) setup delay.
GSM CS Call Setup Time(MOC+MTC) =
Duration from GSM MOC and MTC call
setup request time to GSM MOC and MTC
call setup success time
WCDMA CS Call Unit: millisecond Indicates the WCDMA MOC and MTC call
Setup Time(MOC setup delay.
+MTC) WCDMA CS Call Setup Time(MOC+MTC)
= Duration from WCDMA MOC and MTC
call setup request time to WCDMA MOC
and MTC call setup success time
LTE to GSM CSFB Value range: 0 to Indicates the LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
Access Success 100 (unit: %) success rate.
Rate(MOC+MTC) LTE to GSM CSFB Access Success Rate =
Number of LTE-to-GSM CSFB access
success times/(Number of LTE-to-GSM
CSFB access success times + Number of
LTE-to-GSM CSFB access failure times) x
100
GSM CS Call Setup Value range: 0 to Indicates the GSM MOC and MTC call
Success Rate(MOC 100 (unit: %) setup success rate.
+MTC) GSM CS Call Setup Success Rate(MOC
+MTC) = Number of GSM MOC and MTC
call setup success times/(Number of GSM
MOC and MTC call setup success times +
Number of GSM MOC and MTC call setup
failure times) x 100
WCDMA CS Call Value range: 0 to Indicates the WCDMA MOC and MTC call
Setup Success 100 (unit: %) setup success rate.
Rate(MOC+MTC) WCDMA CS Call Setup Success Rate(MOC
+MTC) = Number of WCDMA MOC and
MTC call setup success times/(Number of
WCDMA MOC and MTC call setup success
times + Number of WCDMA MOC and
MTC call setup failure times) x 100
PS Analysis
Session App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate at the uplink
Throughput UL application layer during the whole session.
For details about the session process, see
FTP service process.
NOTE
The UE IEs App.Throughput UL and Session
App Throughput UL are different.
App.Throughput UL is filtered within the time
ranging from Datatransferstart to
DatatransferEnd/Session End or Session Drop,
whereas Session App Throughput UL is the
average rate at the uplink application layer during
the whole session, including the Session Drop and
Session Error events that occur during the
session.
Session App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average rate at the downlink
Throughput DL application layer during the whole session.
For details about the session process, see
FTP service process.
NOTE
The UE IEs App.Throughput DL and Session
App Throughput DL are different.
App.Throughput DL is filtered within the time
ranging from Datatransferstart to
DatatransferEnd/Session End or Session Drop,
whereas Session App Throughput DL is the
average rate at the uplink application layer during
the whole session, including the Session Drop and
Session Error events that occur during the
session.
CS Analysis
HTTP DL MODE Obtained according The parameter value is Valid time or Valid
VALUE to HTTP DL Size according to HTTP DL MODE value
MODE types.
HTTP UL MODE Obtained according The parameter value is Valid time or Valid
VALUE to HTTP UL Size according to HTTP UL MODE value
MODE types.
GPRS
Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the modulation coding scheme (MCS)
DL currently used on the downlink.
Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the uplink.
UL
Coding Value range: Indicates the coding scheme used on the uplink.
Scheme UL l CS1 to CS4. This IE also indicates the coding scheme that is
l MCS1 to MCS9. mostly used on the uplink within a period of
500 ms.
EGPRS BEP Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the variation coefficient of the BEP.
Cv
EGPRS BER Value range: 0 to 7 Indicates the average value of Bit Error
Mean Probability (BEP).
LLC Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink retransmission rate at the
Retransmissio (unit: %) logical link control (LLC) layer.
n UL
LLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the LLC layer.
DL
LLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the LLC layer.
UL
RLC BLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the downlink block error rate (BLER)
DL (unit: %) at the Radio Link Control (RLC) layer.
RLC Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the uplink retransmission rate at the
Retransmissio (unit: %) RLC layer.
n UL
RLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the RLC layer.
DL
RLC Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the RLC layer.
UL
SNDCP Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) downlink at the Subnetwork Dependent
DL Convergence Protocol (SNDCP) layer.
SNDCP Value range: 0 to 1800 Indicates the data throughput rate on the uplink
Throughput (unit: kbit/s) at the SNDCP layer.
UL
Tx Power PS Value range: -64 to 63. Indicates the transmit power in the PS domain.
l GSM850: 5 dBm to This IE is valid only in dedicated mode.
39 dBm
l GSM900: 5 dBm to
39 dBm
l DCS1800: 0 dBm
to 36 dBm
l PCS 1900: 0 dBm
to 33 dBm
GSM
BCCH along Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the base transceiver station identity
with BSIC (7, 7) code (BSIC) corresponding to the ARFCNs of
the broadcast control channel.
BER Full Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the bit error rate (Full value).
(unit: %) BER Full = Number of error bits (Full value)/
Total number of bits (Full value) x 100%.
BER Sub Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value).
(unit: %) BER Sub = Number of error bits (Sub value)/
Total number of bits (Sub value) x 100%.
BSIC Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base transceiver
(7, 7) station.
C/I Best Value range: -30 to Indicates the best C/I, the ARFCN with the best
+35 (unit: dB) C/I, and the received signal strength of the
ARFCN with the best C/I.
C/I Worst Value range: -30 to Indicates the worst C/I, the ARFCN with the
+35 (unit: dB) worst C/I, and the received signal strength of
the ARFCN with the worst C/I.
FER Full Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the frame error rate (Full value).
(unit: %) FER Full = Number of error frames (Full
value)/Total number of frames (Full value) x
100%.
FER Sub Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value).
(unit: %) FER Sub = Number of error frames (Sub
value)/Total number of frames (Sub value) x
100%.
MAIO Value range: 0 to 63 Indicates the mobile allocation index offset. The
mobile allocation index offset indicates the
position from which the frequency hopping
starts in the hopping frequency list. This IE is
valid only when the frequency hopping is used.
Neighbor Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
BCCH channel (BCCH) of a neighboring cell.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124
l DCS1800: 512 to 885
l PCS1900: 512 to 815
Neighbor Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base station of a
BSIC (7, 7) neighboring cell.
Neighbor C31 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a GPRS
+127 (unit: dB) neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in packet
mode.
Neighbor C32 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a
+127 (unit: dB) GPRS neighboring cell. This IE is valid only in
packet mode.
Power Control Value range: 0 to 31 Indicates the transmit power level scheduled by
Level the base station. This IE is valid only in
dedicated mode.
Radio Link Value range: 0 to 64 Indicates the current value of the radio link
Timeout timeout counter.
Current
Radio Link Value range: 4 to 64 Indicates the maximum value of the radio link
Timeout Max timeout counter. This IE is valid only in
dedicated mode.
RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level (Full value) in the idle
Full -47 (unit: dBm) state.
RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level in the idle state.
Idle -47 (unit: dBm)
RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level in the service state or the
(Idle+Sub) -47 (unit: dBm) idle state.
RxLev Burst Value range: -110 to Indicates the RX level (Sub value) in the service
Sub -47 (unit: dBm) state.
RxLev Full Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Full
-47 (unit: dBm) value).
RxLev Idle Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength of the
-47 (unit: dBm) serving cell in the idle state.
RxLev (Idle Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Sub
+Sub) -47 (unit: dBm) value) or the received signal strength in the idle
state.
RxLev Sub Value range: -110 to Indicates the received signal strength (Sub
-47 (unit: dBm) value).
RxQual Full Value range: -0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Full
(unit: dBm) value).
RxQual Sub Value range: -0 to 7 Indicates the received signal quality (Sub
(unit: dBm) value).
ServBCCH Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the ARFCNs of the broadcast control
channel (BCCH) of a serving cell.
l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251
l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124
l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124
l DCS1800: 512 to 885
l PCS1900: 512 to 815
ServBSIC Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the identity code of a base station of a
(7, 7) serving cell.
ServCell C1 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a serving
+127 (unit: dB) cell. This IE is valid only in idle mode.
ServCell C31 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell selection criterion of a GPRS
+127 (unit: dB) serving cell. This IE is valid only in packet
mode.
ServCell C32 Value range: -127 to Indicates the cell reselection criterion of a
+127 (unit: dB) GPRS serving cell. This IE is valid only in
packet mode.
Neighbor Cells
BCCH for Nth Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the BCCH value of the Nth strongest
Best in GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells
BSIC for Nth Value range: (0, 0) to Indicates the BSIC value of the Nth strongest
Best in (7, 7) GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells
RxLev for Nth Value range: -110 to Indicates the RxLev value of the Nth strongest
Best in -47 (unit: dBm) GSM neighboring cell sorted by RxLev.
Neighbor N is a positive integer.
Cells
Delay
GSM Call Unit: millisecond Indicates the setup delay of an outgoing call or
Setup Time an incoming call on the GSM network.
Delay The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Call setup delay =
T(GSMCallSetup) - T(GSMCallAttempt).
GSM Attach Unit: millisecond Indicates the interval between the time when the
Time Delay Attach request is sent and the time when the
Attach is successful.
The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Attach delay = T(Attach
Complete) - T(Attach Request).
GSM Detach Unit: millisecond Indicates the interval between the time when the
Time Delay Detach request is sent and the time when the
Detach is successful.
The value can be obtained by using the
following formula: Detach delay = T(Detach
Complete) - T(Detach Request).
GSM PDP Unit: millisecond Indicates the PDP activation delay on the GSM
Activation network.
Time Delay PDP activation delay = Time when the Activate
PDP Context Accept message is received -
Time when the Activate PDP Context Request
message is sent
Codec Usage
AMR Codec Unit: kbit/s Indicates the voice rate on the uplink.
UL The values are as follows:
l 4.75
l 5.15
l 5.90
l 6.70
l 7.40
l 7.95
l 10.20
l 12.20
AMR Codec Unit: kbit/s Indicates the voice rate on the downlink.
DL The values are as follows:
l 4.75
l 5.15
l 5.90
l 6.70
l 7.40
l 7.95
l 10.20
l 12.20
EDGE
Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the uplink.
UL
Current MCS Value range: 1 to 9 Indicates the MCS currently used on the
DL downlink.
Nth Best Range: -141 to Indicates the Nth best receiving level of the M
RxLev_M -47, Unit: dBm frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.
BSIC For Nth - Indicates the base station identity code (BSIC)
Best RxLev_M corresponding to the Nth best receiving level of the
M frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.
C/I For Nth Unit: dB Indicates the C/I corresponding to the Nth best
Best RxLev_M receiving level of the M frequency band.
Value range of N: 1 to 6.
1st Best C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the best C/I of the M frequency band.
Worst C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the worst C/I of the M frequency band.
Average C/I_M Unit: dB Indicates the average C/I of the M frequency band.
Average RSSI Unit: dBm Indicates the average strength of signals in the M-N
on M-N frequency band.
Active Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the active set. For
details, see Table 21-2.
Monitor Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Monitor Set. For
details, see Table 21-8.
Detected Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Detected Set.
For details, see Table 21-5.
Ec/Io Max For SC in Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to Ec/Io Max For SC
Active Set in Active Set. For details, see Table 21-17.
RSCP Max For SC Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RSCP Max For SC
in Active Set in Active Set.For details, see Table 21-18.
Ec/Io For SC in All Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to Ec/Io For SC in All
Set Set.For details, see Table 21-19.
RSCP For SC in All Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RSCP For SC in All
Set Set.For details, see Table 21-20.
RACH and PRACH Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RACH and PRACH.
For details, see Table 21-16.
RLC Parameters Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to RLC Parameters.
For details, see Table 21-14.
Power Control Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the Power Control.
For details, see Table 21-9.
BLER Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the block error rate
(BLER). For details, see Table 21-3.
UMTS Cell Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to UMTS Cell
Reselection Reselection. For details, see Table 21-12.
AMR Codecs Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to AMR Codecs. For
details, see Table 21-15.
RLC Throughput Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the RLC
Throughput. For details, see Table 21-10.
HSDPA Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the HSDPA. For
details, see Table 21-6.
HSUPA Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the HSUPA. For
details, see Table 21-7.
WCDMA Service Indicates the WCDMA service type, including AMR, VP, and PS.
Type
Whole PP (UE) Indicates an IE that is used to specify the pilot pollution information
about all DT points that meet the conditions for producing pilot
pollution.
PTT Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the PTT. For details,
see Table 21-11.
Active Set Size Value range: 0 to 6 Indicates the number of active sets.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth
In Active Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.
Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the ratio of the peak Ec/Io of the
Best In Active Set (unit: dB) cell with the Nth strongest signal strength
within an active set.
N is a positive integer.
Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak received signal code
Best In Active Set (unit: dBm) power (RSCP) of the cell with the Nth
strongest signal strength within an active
set.
N is a positive integer.
RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the Nth
In Active Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.
SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the Nth
Active Set strongest signal strength within an active
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive integer.
Total Ec/Io in Unit: dBm Indicates the total Ec/Io of wanted signals
Active Set in the active set.
Total RSCP in Unit: dBm Indicates the total RSCP in the active set.
Active Set
Total Cover Not - Indicates the total grids with poor uplink
Balanced Grid and downlink coverage balance.
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Total RSCP plus
Tx power is less than or equal to -85 dBm
take up 80% or less of the total sampling
points.
LAI for Nth Best in - Indicates the location area identity (LAI)
Active Set of the cell with the Nth strongest signal in
an active set.
N is a positive integer.
RAI for Nth Best in - Indicates the routing area identity (RAI) of
Active Set the cell with the Nth strongest signal in an
active set.
N is a positive integer.
BLER for FACH Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on the forward access
(unit: %) channel (FACH).
BLER for RACH Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on the random access
(unit: %) channel (RACH).
BLER for Channel Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on channel N.
N (unit: %) N is an integer ranging from 0 to 32.
BLER for Total Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the BLER on all channels.
Channel (unit: %)
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the
In Detected Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the peak Ec/Io of a detected set.
Best In Detected Set (unit: dB)
Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak RSCP of a detected set.
Best In Detected Set (unit: dBm)
RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the
In Detected Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the
Detected Set strongest signal strength within a detected
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
HS-SCCH Decoding Success Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the HS-SCCH decoding
100 (unit: %) success rate.
HS-SCCH Decoding Success
Rate = Number of successful HS-
SCCH decoding/Number of HS-
SCCH decoding attempts x 100%
Serving Cell PSC CarrierN Value range: 0 to Indicates the scrambling code of
511 an HSDPA serving cell carrierN
in Idle, Cell_FACH, Cell_PCH,
or URA_PCH mode.
N is a nonnegtive integer.
Serving Cell Ec/Io CarrierN Value range: -40 Indicates the Ec/Io value of the
to 0 (unit: dB) HSDPA serving cell carrierN.
N is a nonnegtive integer.
Serving Cell RSCP CarrierN Value range: Indicates the RSCP of the
-128 to 0 (unit: HSDPA serving cell carrierN.
dBm) N is a nonnegtive integer.
CarrierN or Total
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.
HS-DSCH CQI
CarrierN or Total
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.
HS-SCCH Less Operation Rate Value range: 0 to Indicates the rate of the transport
100 (unit: %) blocks (TBs) that use the HS-
SCCH Less Operation mode to
total TBs.
CarrierN
NOTE
N is a nonnegtive integer:
l If the value of N is 0, the primary carrier is used.
l If the value of N is 1, the secondary carrier is used.
l Total indicates all carriers.
Buffer Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the limited rate of the buffer.
(unit: %)
Combined RG Hold Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the holding rate of the relative
Rate (unit: %) grant (RG) after the combination.
Combined RG UP Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the increase rate of the RG after
Rate (unit: %) the combination.
Combined RG Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the decrease rate of the RG after
Down Rate (unit: %) the combination.
E-DCH PSC Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the primary scrambling code of
the EDCH.
HSUPA SBLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the scheduled block error rate of
(unit: %) the HSUPA.
HSUPA 1st SBLER Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the scheduled block error rate of
(unit: %) the first frame.
MAC-e PDU Served Value range: 0 to Indicates the served rate of MAC-e PDUs.
Rate 2000 (unit: kbit/s)
Power Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the power limited rate.
(unit: %)
SG Limited Rate Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the serving grant limited rate.
(unit: %)
SERV CELL Value range: 0 to 5 Indicates the SERV CELL of the HSDPA
serving cell.
Res.Bler Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the residual block error rate at
(unit: %) the RLC layer, which is calculated through
the following formula: Number of frames
that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer|
Total number of transmissions at the RLC
layer x 100%.
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth
In Monitor Set (unit: dB) strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.
Peak Ec/Io for Nth Value range: -40 to 0 Indicates the peak Ec/Io of the cell with
Best In Monitor Set (unit: dB) the Nth strongest signal strength within a
monitor set.
N is a positive intager.
Peak RSCP for Nth Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the peak RSCP of the cell with
Best In Monitor Set (unit: dBm) the Nth strongest signal strength within a
monitor set.
N is a positive intager.
RSCP For Nth Best Value range: -128 to 0 Indicates the RSCP of the cell with the Nth
In Monitor Set (unit: dBm) strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.
SC For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 Indicates the PSC of the cell with the Nth
Monitor Set strongest signal strength within a monitor
set.
NOTE
The number of the IEs is filtered based on the
RSCP. The IEs without RSCP are not displayed
on the GUI. Therefore, the number displayed
on the GUI is not greater than the number of
IEs corresponding to the RSCP.
N is a positive intager.
PUSCH PUSCH Max Value range: -40 Indicates the maximum transmit
TxPower to 23 (unit: dBm) power of the PUSCH or PUCCH.
Delta Tfi - -
RLC PDU Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the retransmission rate of uplink
Retransmission Rate (unit: %) PDUs at the RLC layer.
UL
RLC PDU Errors Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the error rate of downlink packet
Rate DL (unit: %) data units (PDUs) at the RLC layer.
P-SC Nth PSC in Value range: 0 Indicates the scrambling code of the Nth
Neighboring to 511 strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
Cells example:
l 1st P-SC in Neighboring Cells indicates
the scrambling code of the first
strongest cell.
l 7th P-SC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the scrambling code of the
seventh strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.
Ec/Io Nth Ec/Io in Value range: Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to
Neighboring -40 to 0 (unit: the total power density of the received
Cells dB) bandwidth (Ec/Io) of the Nth strongest cell
sorted by RSRP. For example:
l 1st Ec/Io in Neighboring Cells
indicates the Ec/Io of the first strongest
cell.
l 7th Ec/Io in Neighboring Cells
indicates the Ec/Io of the seventh
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.
RSCP Nth RSCP Value range: Indicates the received signal code power
in -200 to -30 (RSCP) of the Nth strongest cell sorted by
Neighboring (unit: dBm) RSRP. For example:
Cells l 1st RSCP in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSCP of the first strongest
cell.
l 7th RSCP in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSCP of the seventh
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.
ARFCN Nth ARFCN Value range: 0 Indicates the broadcast channel frequency
in to 1023 of the Nth strongest cell sorted by RSSI.
Neighboring l GSM-R For example:
Cells 850: 128 to l 1st ARFCN in Neighboring Cells
251 indicates the ARFCN of the first
l P-GSM strongest cell.
900: 1 to l 3rd ARFCN in Neighboring Cells
124 indicates the ARFCN of the third
l E-GSM strongest cell.
900: 0 to N is a positive integer.
124 and
975 to
1023
l DCS 1800:
512 to 885
l PCS 1900:
512 to 810
BSIC Nth BSIC in Value range: Indicates the base station identity code
Neighboring (0,0) to (7,7) (BSIC) of the Nth strongest cell sorted by
Cells RSSI. For example:
l 1st BSIC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the BSIC of the first strongest
cell.
l 3rd BSIC in Neighboring Cells
indicates the BSIC of the third
strongest cell.
N is a positive integer.
RSSI Nth RSSI in Value range: Indicates the received signal strength
Neighboring -120 to 0 indicator (RSSI) of the Nth strongest cell
Cells (unit: dBm) sorted by RSSI. For example:
l 1st RSSI in Neighboring Cells indicates
the RSSI of the first strongest cell.
l 3rd RSSI in Neighboring Cells
indicates the RSSI of the third strongest
cell.
N is a positive integer.
AMR Frame Rate The values are as follows: Indicates the frame rate on
l 12.2 kbit/s the uplink or downlink when
the value of Vocoder Mode
l 10.2 kbit/s is AMR.
l 7.95 kbit/s
l 7.40 kbit/s
l 6.70 kbit/s
l 5.90 kbit/s
l 5.15 kbit/s
l 4.75 kbit/s
AMR-WB Frame Rate The values are as follows: Indicates the frame rate on
l 6.60 kbit/s the uplink or downlink when
the value of Vocoder Mode
l 8.85 kbit/s is AMR-WB.
l 12.65 kbit/s
l 14.25 kbit/s
l 15.85 kbit/s
l 18.25 kbit/s
l 19.85 kbit/s
l 23.05 kbit/s
l 23.85 kbit/s
RSCP Max For SCN in unit: dBm Indicates the coverage chart
Active Set of the scrambling code N for
the strongest cell in an
active set.
NOTE
The strongest cell refers to the
cell with the largest RSCP.
N is a nonnegtive integer.
RSCP For SCN in All Set unit: dBm Indicates the RSCP
distribution chart of the
scrambling code N in all
sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.
Peak RSCP For SCN unit: dBm Indicates the peak received
signal code power (RSCP)
of the scrambling code N in
all sets.
N is a nonnegtive integer.
UARFCN Ec/Io For Nth Best Indicates the Ec/Io of the first N best
Service Cell serving cells among all the drive test
points. Value N is a positive integer.
RSCP For 1st Best Indicates the RSCP of the first N best
Service Cell serving cells among all the drive test
points. Value N is a positive integer.
Active Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the active set. For
details, see Table 21-22.
Candidate Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the candidate set.
For details, see Table 21-23.
Neighbor Set Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the neighbor set. For
details, see Table 21-24.
Power Control Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the power control.
For details, see Table 21-25.
FER Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the FER. For details,
see Table 21-26.
RLP Throughput Indicates an IE set, including the IEs related to the RLP throughput.
For details, see Table 21-27.
Active Set Size Value range: 0 to 6 Indicates the number of active sets.
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Active Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an active set.
PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Active Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an active set.
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Candidate Set Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an candidate set.
PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Candidate Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an candidate set.
Ec/Io For Nth Best Value range: -40 to 0 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
In Neighbor Set Set (unit: dB) Ec/Io of the cell with the Nth strongest
signal strength within an neighbor set.
PN For Nth Best In Value range: 0 to 511 N is integer starting from 1. Indicates the
Neighbor Set PN of the cell with the Nth strongest signal
strength within an neighbor set.
Rx Power Range: -127 to 128. Indicates the power control value, that is,
Unit: dB. the adjustment step of the transmit
power.
In the windows related to LTE UEs, PCC refers to the primary component carrier, and SCC
refers to the secondary component carrier. Code0 refers to code word 0, and Code1 refers to
code word 1. UL refers to uplink transmission, and DL refers to downlink transmission.
IE Set Description
Serving and Contains IEs related to Serving and Neighboring. For details,
Neighboring Cells see Table 21-29.
Antenna Measurement Contains IEs related to Antenna Measurement. For details, see
Table 21-30.
Delay Contains IEs related to Delay. For details, see Table 21-31.
Power Contains IEs related to Power. For details, see Table 21-32.
CQI Contains IEs related to CQI. For details, see Table 21-34.
IE Set Description
BLER Contains IEs related to BLER. For details, see Table 21-35.
Camp Cell Information Contains IEs related to Camp Cell Information. For details,
see Table 21-36.
Radio Parameter Contains IEs related to Radio Parameter. For details, see
Table 21-37.
UE State Contains IEs related to UE State. For details, see Table 21-38.
MIMO Contains IEs related to MIMO. For details, see Table 21-39.
MCS Contains IEs related to MCS. For details, see Table 21-40.
Iperf Contains IEs related to Iperf. For details, see Table 21-41.
Custom Contains IEs related to Custom. For details, see Table 21-42.
HARQ Contains IEs related to HARQ. For details, see Table 21-43.
PRB Contains IEs related to PRB. For details, see Table 21-44.
Intra RAT Interrupt Contains IEs related to Intra RAT Interrupt Delay. For
Delay details, see Table 21-46.
Interrupt Time Delay Contains IEs related to Interrupt Time Delay. For details, see
Table 21-49.
Freq Scanning Contains IEs related to Freq Scanning. For details, see Table
21-51.
Cell Scan Contains IEs related to Cell Scan. For details, see Table 21-52.
VoLTE Parameters Contains IEs related to VoLTE Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-53.
PDSCH Parameters Contains IEs related to PDSCH Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-54.
PHY MAC RLC PDCP Contains IEs related to PHY MAC RLC PDCP RRC NAS
RRC NAS Information Information. For details, see Table 21-55.
IE Set Description
eMBMS Parameters Contains IEs related to eMBMS Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-57.
Value: FDD or
Duplex Mode Indicates the duplex mode.
TDD
Antenna None
Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP measurement
Measurement RSRPMeas
to -40 (unit: value of the CRS for antenna N of
NOTE CRS RSRP
dBm) non-RSRP measurement set.
N is zero or a AntennaN
positive
integer. None
Value range: -140 Indicates the RSRP measurement
RSRPMeas
to -40 (unit: value of the CRS for antenna N of
DRS RSRP
dBm) non-RSRP measurement set.
AntennaN
None
RSRPMeas Indicates the RSRP measurement
Value range: -140
CRS DRS value of the CRS on the RB of the
to -40 (unit:
Used RB DRS for antenna N of non-RSRP
dBm)
RSRP measurement set.
AntennaN
CRS DRS
Value range: -140 Indicates the measurement value of
Used RB
to -40 (unit: RSRP for CRS on the RB of the DRS
RSRP
dBm) for antenna N.
Antenna 0
RSRP
Indicates an RSRP measurement
measSubfram -
subframe set.
ePattern
None RSRP
Indicates a non-RSRP measurement
measSubfram -
subframe set.
ePattern
VoLTE Fast
Return LTE Unit: ms Indicates the VoLTE fast return delay.
Delay
IMS Register
Unit: ms Indicates the IMS registration delay.
Delay
LTE SCC1
Activated Unit: ms Indicates the SCC activation delay.
Delay
LTE SCC1
Deactivated Unit: ms Indicates the SCC deactivation delay.
Delay
183 session to
Indicates the duration from the time
ERABEstablis
when the 183 message is received to
hAttempt(QCI Unit: ms
the time when the ERABEstablishAt-
=1)
tempt(QCI=1) message is received.
Delay(MTC)
SRS RB
Range: 0 to 100. Indicates the resource block.
Number
Power PUSCH Max Value range: -50 Indicates the maximum transmit
Control > TxPower to 30 (unit: dBm) power of the PUSCH.
PUSCH
PUSCH Path Unit: dB Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH.
Loss
Delta Tfi - -
SRS TxPower Value range: -50 Indicates the average transmit power
Avg to 30 (unit: dBm) of the SRS within one second.
IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit
LTE RLC
RLC Indicates the downlink
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
Throughput throughput at the RLC layer.
DL
IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit
LTE RLC
Indicates the uplink throughput
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
at the RLC layer.
UL
PDCP
Indicates the downlink
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
throughput at the PDCP layer.
PDCP DL
Throughput PDCP
Indicates the uplink throughput
Throughput Unit: kbit/s
at the PDCP layer.
UL
IE Set Value
IE Name Description
Range/Unit
Csi
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1
Csi
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2
Csi
MeasSubfram
Indicates the average CQI of the
eSet1 -
measurement subframe set 1.
SubBandCQI
Average
Csi
MeasSubfram Indicates the maximum wideband
eSet1 - CQI of the measurement subframe set
WideBandCQ 1.
IMax
CQI AckMcsOffset Value range: 0 to Indicates the MCS offset index of the
Configuratio Index 15 acknowledgment (ACK).
n Information
AperiodCQIR Value range: Indicates the aperiodic CQI report
eportMode Mode 1-2, Mode mode of the PUSCH.
2-0, Mode 2-2,
Mode 3-0, Mode
3-1
l Synchronizati
on
SyncFlag l Non- Indicates the synchronization flag.
synchronizati
on
Value range: 0 to
UL EARFCN Indicates the uplink EARFCN.
262143
Value range: 0 to
DL EARFCN Indicates the downlink EARFCN.
262143
l 1.4 MHz
l 3 MHz
UL l 5 MHz
Indicates the uplink bandwidth.
BandWidth l 10 MHz
l 15 MHz
l 20 MHz
l 1.4 MHz
l 3 MHz
DL l 5 MHz
Indicates the downlink bandwidth.
BandWidth l 10 MHz
l 15 MHz
l 20 MHz
csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1
csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2
PDSCH RB
Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub -
PDSCH channel per subframe.
Frame
PUSCH RB
Indicates the number of RBs on the
Number/Sub -
PUSCH channel per subframe.
Frame
Value Range: 0
TAC Indicates the tracking Area Code.
to 65535.
Radio Radio
Parameter Parameter - Indicates the cell ID.
CellIndex
Value range: 0 to
1
The legend
segments are as
RxChCorFact follows: Indicates the antenna-related
or l 0 to 0.3: coefficient of the receive channel.
green
l 0.3 to 0.6:
yellow
l 0.6 to 1: red
Value range: 0 to
1
The legend
segments are as
TxChCorFact follows: Indicates the antenna-related
or l 0 to 0.3: coefficient of the transmit channel.
green
l 0.3 to 0.6:
yellow
l 0.6 to 1: red
Value range: 16
PUSCH TB Indicates the size of a transport block
to 75376 (unit:
Size (TB) on the PUSCH.
byte)
SINR
Attenna0 - Indicates the SINR difference
-
SINR between two antennas.
Attenna1
l AM
(Acknowledg
e Mode)
l UM (Un-
RLC Mode acknowledge Indicates the data transmission mode.
Mode)
l TM
(Transparent
Mode)
Value range: 16
PDSCH TB0 Indicates the size of the downlink
to 75376 (unit:
Size TB0.
byte)
Value range: 16
PDSCH TB1 Indicates the size of the downlink
to 75376 (unit:
Size TB1.
byte)
csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
1.
eSet1
csi-
Indicates measurement subframe set
MeasSubfram -
2.
eSet2
Value range: 0 to
PCI Indicates the physical cell identifier.
503
Value range:
Indicates the received signal strength
RSSI -140 to -10 (unit:
indicator.
dBm)
LTE RSRP
Continuously Indicates the continuous RSRP weak
unit: m
Weak Cover coverage distance.
Distance
LTE RSRP
Continuously
unit: m Indicates the RSRP without values.
No Cover
Distance
LTE UE
Continual
Indicates the continuous UE high-
High Power unit: m
power transmit distance.
Transmit
Distance
LTE
Continuously
Indicates the continuous poor SINR
Bad Sinr unit: m
distance.
Cover
Distance
Last TA TAC (Tracing Value range: 0 to Indicates the code of the closest
Area Code) 65535 tracking area (TA).
PLMN
(Public Land Indicates the public land mobile
-
Mobile network (PLMN).
Network)
UE l Closed loop
Information l Open loop
l Single-
Antenna antenna
Indicates the antenna selection mode.
Selection transmit
l Power aiding
l Invalid
antenna
Value range: 1 to
QCI Indicates the QoS class identifier.
9
2T2R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
2T2R OL SM
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R OL
Used
100 SM in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
MultiUser
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of MultiUser
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
2T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
2T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 2T2R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
Single Port5
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of Single
Used
100 Port5 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
Single Port56
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of Single
Used
100 Port56 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T2R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T2R OL SM
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R OL
Used
100 SM in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage
4T2R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T2R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R SFBC
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R
Used
100 SFBC in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank3 Used
100 Rank3 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R OL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R OL
Rank4 Used
100 Rank4 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank1 Used
100 Rank1 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank2 Used
100 Rank2 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank3 Used
100 Rank3 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
4T4R CL
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of 4T4R CL
Rank4 Used
100 Rank4 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
BF Port7
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port7
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
BF Port8
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port8
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
BF Port78
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of BF Port78
Used
100 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
TM9 PORT7
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT7 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
TM9 PORT8
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT8 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
TM9 PORT78
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT78 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
TM9 PORT79
Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used
100 PORT79 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
TM9
PORT710 Value range: 1 to Indicates the percentage of TM9
Used 100 PORT710 in MIMO.
Percentage(%)
MCS RB Count
MCS Modulation
MCS Count_N
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0 or codeword1.
MCS Modulation_N
N is 0 or 1, which means codeword0 or codeword1.
l Repetition
Indicates whether to retransmit the
Repetition l Non- carrier.
Repetition
Value range: 0 to
1000
NOTE
This counter does
DL ReTx not have legend Indicates the number of downlink
Num and share the carrier retransmission times.
same legend with
the <b>UL ReTx
Num</b>
counter.
UL/D
UL/DL PRB Indicates the number of uplink/downlink
L PRB -
Total physical RBs.
Total
UL
Indicates the number of uplink RBs
RB Value range: 0 to
RBNum N within a statistical period. The value of N
Numb 100
ranges from 0 to 99.
er
UL
Value range: 0 to Indicates the start point of the uplink RB.
RB RBStart N
99 The value of N ranges from 0 to 99.
Start
DL
SubBa
Indicates the number of times a subband
nd
Value range: 0 to is scheduled in the downlink. The
Sched SubBand N
1000 number of subbands ranges from 0 to 24,
ule
and the value of N ranges from 0 to 24.
Numb
er
SIntra Search Value range: 0 Indicates the threshold (in dBm) for
to 62 (unit: intra-frequency signal measurements.
dBm)
RTP Lost Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the packet loss rate for
Rate(%) (unit: %) audios.
(QCI1)
RTP Lost Value range: 0 to 100 Indicates the packet loss rate for
Rate(%) (unit: %) videos.
(QCI2)
PDSCH System Value range: 0 to 1023 Indicates the system frame number
Parameter Frame (SFN).
Number
PMCH SNR Value range: -20 to 50 Indicates the SNR of the Physical
(unit: dB) Multicast Channel.
PMCH BLER Range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the block error rate of the
%) PMCH.
Service Area ID Value range: 0 to 255 Indicates the service area ID of the
eMBMS.
SymbosDiscardRate Range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the packet loss rate at the
%) TMGI application layer.
IE Set Description
RSRP Value range: -140 to -40, Unit: Indicates the reference signal
dBm received power.
RSRQ Value range: -140 to -40, Unit: Indicates the reference signal
dB received quality.
RSSI Value range: -140 to -10, Unit: Indicates the received signal
dBm strength indicator.
SINR Value range: -20 to 50, Unit: Indicates the average SINR.
dB
Tx Power Value range: -50 to 23, Unit: Indicates the transmit power.
dBm.
NOTE
If the value is less than -50 or
more than 23, it will be -7 and 23
respectively.
Sub Carrier Spacing Value range: 3.75 and 15. Indicates the sub carrier
Unit: KHz. spacing.
PUSCH Messages Sent Unit: byte Indicates the size of data sent
by UEs.
PUSCH Message Total Unit: byte Indicates the size of data sent
on the PUSCH.
RLC UL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the uplink initial
BLER.
RLC DL(%) Value range: 0 to 100. Unit: %. Indicates the downlink initial
BLER.
EARFCN Scanner Nth Value range: 0 Indicates the EARFCN of the Nth
EARFCN to 262143 strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
example:
l Scanner 1st EARFCN indicates the
EARFCN of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th EARFCN indicates the
EARFCN of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
CI Scanner Nth Value range: 0 Indicates the CI of the Nth strongest cell
ECI to 255 sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st ECI indicates the CI of the
first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th ECI indicates the CI of the
sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
PCI Scanner Nth - Indicates the PCI of the Nth strongest cell
PCI sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st PCI indicates the PCI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th PCI indicates the PCI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
RSRP Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSRP of the Nth strongest
RSRP -140 to -40 cell sorted by RSRP. For example:
(unit: dBm) l Scanner 1st RSRP indicates the RSRP
of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSRP indicates the RSRP
of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
RSRQ Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSRQ of the Nth strongest
RSRQ -40 to 0 (unit: cell sorted by RSRP. For example:
dB) l Scanner 1st RSRQ indicates the RSRQ
of the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSRQ indicates the RSRQ
of the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
RSSI Scanner Nth Value range: Indicates the RSSI of the Nth strongest cell
RSSI -140 to -10 sorted by RSRP. For example:
(unit: dBm) l Scanner 1st RSSI indicates the RSSI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th RSSI indicates the RSSI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
SIR Scanner Nth Unit: dB Indicates the SIR of the Nth strongest cell
SIR sorted by RSRP. For example:
l Scanner 1st SIR indicates the SIR of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th SIR indicates the SIR of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
Multi Path Scanner Nth - Indicates the multipathing delay of the Nth
Delay Multi Path strongest cell sorted by RSRP. For
Delay example:
l Scanner 1st Multi Path Delay indicates
the Multi Path Delay value of the first
strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th Multi Path Delay indicates
the Multi Path Delay value of the sixth
strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
ISSI Scanner Nth Unit: dBm Indicates the ISSI of the Nth strongest cell
ISSI sorted by RSRP.
l Scanner 1st ISSI indicates the ISSI of
the first strongest cell.
l Scanner 6th ISSI indicates the ISSI of
the sixth strongest cell.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
Nth RSRP_M Value range: Indicates the RSRP of the cell with
-140 to -40 EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
(unit: dBm) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.
Nth RSRQ_M Value range: Indicates the RSRQ of the cell with
-40 to 0 (unit: EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
dB) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.
Nth RSSI_M Value range: Indicates the RSSI of the cell with
-140 to -10 EARFCN M and the Nth strongest signal
(unit: dBm) strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.
Nth Multi Path Delay_M - Indicates the multi-path delay of the cell
with EARFCN M and the Nth strongest
signal strength.
The value of N ranges from 1 to 6.
M indicates the EARFCN scanned by the
scanner.
GSM Island The values are as Indicates the isolated island effect.
follows: The isolated island occurs when both of the
l Good: indicates that following conditions are met: (1) TA ≥ 2;
no cells are (2) RxLev Sub > -80.00 dBm
experiencing the
isolated island effect.
l Bad: indicates that
there are cells
experiencing the
isolated island effect.
R99 App Value range: 0 to 14336 Indicates the uplink throughput at the R99
Throughput UL (unit: kbit/s) application layer.
HSUPA App Value range: 0 to 6144 Indicates the uplink throughput at the
Throughput UL (unit: kbit/s) HSUPA application layer.
R99 App Value range: 0 to 14336 Indicates the downlink throughput at the
Throughput DL (unit: kbit/s) R99 application layer.
HSDPA App Value range: 0 to 43008 Indicates the downlink throughput at the
Throughput DL (unit: kbit/s) HSDPA application layer.
AP Scan Result Top N Nth Best -10 to -140 Indicates the receive signal
RSSI RSSI strength of the Nth strongest
cell sorted by RSSI. The
value of N is less than or
equal to 6.
For example:
l 1st Best RSSI indicates
the signal strength of the
first strongest cell sorted
by RSSI.
l 2nd Best RSSI indicates
the signal strength of the
second strongest cell
sorted by RSSI.
RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
Channel Channel dynamically displayed
XX ARFCN. XX indicates the
ARFCN. For example, RSSI
for Channel 2437 indicates
the RSSI value of
dynamically displayed
Channel 2437.
RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
BSSID BSSID XX dynamically displayed
BSSID.
RSSI for RSSI for -10 to -140 Indicates the RSSI value of a
SSID SSID XX dynamically displayed SSID.
In the windows related to TD-SCDMA UEs, PCC refers to the primary component carrier,
and SCC refers to the secondary component carrier.
Radio Parameters Contains IEs related to Radio Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-69.
Serving and Contains IEs related to Serving and Neighboring. For details,
Neighboring Cells see Table 21-70.
Power Control Contains IEs related to Power Control. For details, see Table
21-72.
IE Set Description
TD System Paramenters Contains IEs related to TD System Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-73.
DPCH Parameters Contains IEs related to DPCH Parameters. For details, see
Table 21-74.
Sync TxPower Value range: -50 to 33 (unit: Power level for sending the
dBm) SYNC_UL
UpPCH TxPower Value range: -50 to 33 (unit: Transmit power of the uplink
(dBm) dBm) pilot channel
MCC Value range: 000 to 999 Indicates the mobile country code (000
to 999).
ISCP Worst Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the worst interference signal
code power (ISCP) value on the
PDSCH channel.
ISCP Average Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the average ISCP value on all
timeslots of the PDSCH channel.
ISCP Best Value range: -116 to -25 Indicates the optimal ISCP value on all
timeslots of the PDSCH channel.
PESQ Score Value range: -0.5 Indicates the PESQ downlink score. It
DL to 4.5 is the earliest MOS test standard of
International Telecommunication
Union (ITU). This standard has a
certain difference from the actual
MOS marking standard (1 to 5
scores). The protocol is ITU-T P.862.
PESQ Score Value range: -0.5 Indicates the PESQ uplink score,
UL to 4.5 which is the earliest MOS test
standard defined by the ITU. This
standard has a certain difference from
the actual MOS marking standard (1
to 5 scores). The protocol is ITU-T P.
862.
IE Name Description
Channel Type Indicates the channel through which data packets are
transmitted.
IE Name Description
NOTE
Double-click an IP key message. On the displayed IP Message Detail Information page, select a
information record, press Ctrl+C, and copy the record to a text editor to view the record information.
Alternatively, right-click a information record, choose Copy from the shortcut menu, and copy the
record to a text editor to view the record information.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Authentication Events
This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.
Name Meaning
Security Events
This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
RRC Events
This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this
part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related
operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Detach Detach
MM Process Events
This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer
to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then
perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Handover Events
This section describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then
perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Event1A Event 1A
Event2A Event 2A
Event3A Event 3A
Event4A Event 4A
Event1B Event 1B
Event2B Event 2B
Event3B Event 3B
Event4B Event 4B
Event1C Event 1C
Event2C Event 2C
Event3C Event 3C
Event1D Event 1D
Event2D Event 2D
Event3D Event 3D
Event1E Event 1E
Event2E Event 2E
Event1F Event 1F
Event2F Event 2F
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
HSDPA Events
This section describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this section when
configuring HSDPA events on the WCDMA network and perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
HSUPA Events
This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when
configuring HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related
operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
PTT Events
This section introduces push to talk (PTT) events in the WCDMA technology. When
configuring WCDMA PTT events, you can refer to this section and perform required
operations.
Name Definition
EV-DO Events
This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring
events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
LTE Events
This section describes the predefined LTE events. You can refer to this section when
configuring the LTE events.
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
Name Description
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
vMOS InitialBuffering- End of the initial buffer with a This event is generated when
Finish(2xBitRate) double bit rate the initial buffer is complete and
the buffer zone is filled with
downloaded bytes. Buffer zone
size = 2 x Video source bit rate
which is returned over the
website API.
vMOS InitialBufferin- Initial buffer not completed Initial buffer not completed due
gOthersState to other reasons (such as
software exceptions)
Event Description
Event Description
Event Description
Name Meaning
Name Definition
Authentication Events
This section describes authentication events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring authentication events on the TD-SCDMA network.
Name Definition
Encryption Events
This section describes encryption events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring encryption events on the TD-SCDMA network.
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
Name Definition
MM Process Events
This section describes Mobility Management (MM) process events of the TD-SCDMA
network. You can refer to this section for configuring MM process events on the TD-SCDMA
network.
Name Definition
Handover Events
This section describes handover events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring soft or hard handover events on the TD-SCDMA network.
Name Definition
TDSEvent1A Event 1A
TDSEvent2A Event 2A
TDSEvent3A Event 3A
TDSEvent4A Event 4A
TDSEvent1B Event 1B
Name Definition
TDSEvent2B Event 2B
TDSEvent3B Event 3B
TDSEvent4B Event 4B
TDSEvent1C Event 1C
TDSEvent2C Event 2C
TDSEvent3C Event 3C
TDSEvent1D Event 1D
TDSEvent2D Event 2D
TDSEvent3D Event 3D
TDSEvent1E Event 1E
TDSEvent2E Event 2E
TDSEvent1F Event 1F
TDSEvent2F Event 2F
Name Definition
HSDPA Events
This section describes High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) events of the TD-
SCDMA network. You can refer to this section for configuring HSDPA events on the TD-
SCDMA network.
Name Definition
HSUPA Events
This section describes HSUPA events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring HSUPA events on the TD-SCDMA network.
Name Definition
Name Definition
Internal Events
This section describes internal events of the TD-SCDMA network. You can refer to this
section for configuring internal events.
Name Definition
GtoTDSIdle -
WtoGIdle -
CALL_SETUP_MSG -
End_UEDISCONNECTED -
End_STOPTEST -
UEDisconnected -
HTTP Events
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
PS Session Events
This section describes the PS Session events. You can refer to this section when configuring
PS Session events, and then perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Email Events
This section describes the Email events. You can refer to this section when configuring email
events, and then perform the related operations.
Name Meaning
Name Meaning
Accessibili Session Setup Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of session
ty Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) setups.
Session Setup Success Rate = Data
Transfer Start / Session Start×100.
Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup success rate.
Rate(MOC) to 100 (unit: %) Call Setup Success Rate(MOC) =
Number of call setup success times
(MOC)/Number of call attempts
(MOC) x 100
All Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate
to 100 (unit: %) All Call Drop Rate = Total number
of call drop times of different RATs
for an MOC and MTC/(Total
number of call setup success times
of different RATs for an MOC x 2)
x 100
DNS Host Name Value range: 0 Indicates the DNS parsing success
Resolution Success to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate DNS Host Name Resolution
Success Rate = Number of DNS
parsing success times/Number of
DNS parsing requests x 100
Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup delay
Delay to 100 (unit: %) distribution.
Distributing(MOC) Call Setup Success Delay
Distributing(MOC) = Number of
times the call setup delay is greater
than or equal to 8s/Number of call
setup success times (MOC) x 100
Delay Ping Round Trip Unit: ms Indicates the average delay of ping
Time Avg services.
The value is calculated using the
following formula: Average ping
delay = Total ping delay/Total
number of successful pings.
Retainabili Indicates the Value range: 0 Indicates the session drop rate.
ty session drop rate. to 100 (unit: %) Session Drop Rate = Session Drop /
Data Transfer Start×100.
Service Ping Packet Lost Value range: 0 Indicates the ping packet loss rate.
integrity Rate to 100 (unit: %) Ping packet loss rate = Total
number of ping packet loss times/
Total number of ping packet
transmission times.
Ping Success Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of ping
to 100 (unit: %) services.
Ping success rate = Number of
successful pings/Total number of
pings.
WAP Page Refresh Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of WAP
Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) page refreshes.
WAP Page Refresh Success Rate =
Number of successful WAP page
refreshes/Total number of WAP
page refreshes.
Ping Success Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of ping
to 100 (unit: %) services.
Ping success rate = Number of
successful pings/Total number of
pings.
MMS Send Success Value range: 0 Indicates the MMS sending success
Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
MMS Send Success Rate = Number
of MMS sending successes/Number
of MMS sending attempts.
MMS Receive App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average MMS receive
Throughput Avg rate.
MMS Receive App Throughput
Avg = Total App Throughput
generated in the period from MMS
Receive attempt to MMS Receive
Success and that from MMS
Receive attempt to MMS Receive
Failed/Total number of App
Throughput generated in the period
from MMS Receive attempt to
MMS Receive Success and that
from MMS Receive attempt to
MMS Receive Failed.
MMS Send App Unit: kbit/s Indicates the average MMS send
Throughput Avg rate.
MMS Send App Throughput Avg =
Total App Throughput between
MMS Send attempt and MMS Send
Success/Failed/Number of App
Throughput between MMS Send
attempt and MMS Send Success/
Failed.
Custom Video Play Stop Value range: 0 Indicates the video freeze rate.
Duration Rate to 100 (unit: %) Video Play Stop Duration Rate =
Number of video play buffer ending
times/Number of video play start
times x 100
Combine Call Setup Success Value range: 0 Indicates the call setup success rate
Rate(CS to 100 (unit: %) of concurrent services (PS before
Concurrent PS) CS) during a call.
Call Setup Success Rate(CS
Concurrent PS) = [1 - Concurrent
service (PS before CS) call drop
rate] x 100
Accessibi GSM Attach Value range: 0 Indicates the success rate of attaches.
lity Success Rate to 100 (unit: Attach success rate =
%) GSMAttachSuc/
GSMAttachAttempt x 100
SDCCH Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of an
Rate to 100 (unit: SDCCH.
%) SDCCH call drop rate =
GSMSDCCHCallDrop/
GSMSDCCHAssigned x 100
GSM Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the voice service call drop
Rate to 100 (unit: rate.
%) GSM Call Drop Rate = Number of
voice service call drops/Number of
voice service calls x 100
C/I Bad Grid Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of poor C/I
to 100 (unit: grids.
%) C/I Bad Grid Rate = Number of poor
grids/Total number of grids x 100
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose C/I is less
than or equal to 12 dB take up 20% or
more of the total sampling points.
Retainabi Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 Indicates the GSM call drop rate.
lity to 100 (unit: Call drop rate = GSMCallDropped/
%) (GSMCallSetup (MOC) +
GSMCallSetup (MTC)) x 100.
Data Service Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of data
Drop Rate(on to 100 (unit: %) services.
PDP)
Total Ec/Io Bad Value range: 0 Indicates the percentage of poor Total
Grid Rate to 100 (unit: %) Ec/Io grids.
Total Ec/Io Bad Grid Rate = Number of
poor grids/Total number of grids x
100%
Poor grids refer to those in which the
sampling points whose Ec/Io is less
than or equal to -14 dB take up 10% or
more of the total sampling points.
Retainabili WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the call drop rate of services.
ty Drop Rate to 100 (unit: %) Call Drop Rate = CallDropped/
(IncomingCallSetupSuc+
OutgoingCallSetupSuc) x 100%
Voice Service Value range: 0 Indicates the voice service call drop
Quality Drop to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate Voice Service Quality Drop Rate =
Number of voice service call drop
times/Number of voice service call
times x 100%
WCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the call message drop rate
Message Drop to 100 (unit: %) (calculated based on a 90s long call).
Rate(Call WCDMA Call Message Drop
Duration Rate(Call Duration Time≤90s) =
Time≤90s) Number of long call drops/Total
number of long calls x 100%
PTT PTT Call Drop Value range: 0 Indicates the push to talk (PTT) call
Rate to 100 (unit: %) drop rate.
PTTCallDropped/PTTCallSetupSuc
x 100%
PTT Call Value range: 0 Indicates the PTT call access failure
Access Failure to 100 (unit: %) rate.
Rate PTTCallSetupFail/PTTCallAttempt
x 100%
Kilometer per Value range: Indicates the call drop ratio per
Drop Service 0 to +∞ kilometer.
Call drop ratio per hour = DT duration
in hours/(ERABAbnormalRel x 1000)
Time per Drop Value range: Indicates the call drop ratio per hour.
Service 0 to +∞ Call drop ratio per hour = DT duration
in hours/(ERABAbnormalRel x 3600)
LTE Voice Value range: Indicates the voice service call drop
Service Quality 0 to 100 rate.
Drop Rate (unit: %) LTE Voice Service Quality Drop Rate =
Number of voice service call drop
times/Number of voice service call
times x 100
LTE Voice Call Value range: Indicates the percentage of LTE voice
Setup Rate 0 to 100 call setups.
(unit: %) LTE Voice Call Setup Rate = Number
of times a mobile-originated UE
initiates the Extend Sevice Request
messages at the LTE side/Total number
of times a mobile-originated UE
initiates call setups x 100
Accessibilit LTE Attach Value range: Indicates the attach success rate.
y Success Rate 0 to 100 LTE Attach Success Rate = AttachSuc/
(unit: %) (AttachSuc + AttachFail) x 100
LTE RRC Setup Value range: Indicates the Radio Resource Control
Success Rate 0 to 100 (RRC) setup success rate.
(unit: %) LTE RRC Setup Success Rate =
RRCSetupSuc/(RRCSetupSuc +
RRCSetupFail) x 100
Call Setup Value range: Indicates the call setup success rate.
Success Rate 0 to 100 Call Setup Success Rate =
(unit: %) RRCSetupSuccessRate x
ERABSetupSuccessRate
CSFB Call Setup Value range: Indicates the call setup success rate
Suc Rate 0 to 100 after the CSFB.
(unit: %) CSFB call setup success rate = Number
of successful call setups after the
CSFB/Number of call attempts after the
CSFB x 100
LTE RRC Setup Value range: Indicates the RRC connection setup
Success Rate 0 to 100 success rate (service-related).
(unit: %) LTE RRC Setup Success Rate =
Number of successful RRC connection
setups (service-related)/Number of
RRC connection setup attempts
(service-related) x 100
LTE Radio Setup Value range: Indicates the radio setup success rate.
Success Rate 0 to 100 LTE Radio Setup Success Rate = E-
(unit: %) RAB setup success rate x RRC
connection setup success rate (service-
related) x 100
Retainabilit Service Drop Value range: Indicates the call drop rate.
y Rate 0 to 100 Service drop rate =
(unit: %) ERABAbnormalRel/ERABSetupSuc x
100
LTE RRC Drop Value range: Indicates the RRC call drop rate.
Rate 0 to 100 LTE RRC Drop Rate = Number of
(unit: %) RRC call drop times/Number of
successful RRC establishment x 100
LTE SMS Send Value range: Indicates the LTE SMS message
Success Rate 0 to 100 sending success rate.
(unit: %) LTE SMS Send Success Rate =
Number of successfully sending LTE
SMS messages/(Number of
successfully sending LTE SMS
messages + Number of failures in
sending LTE SMS messages) x 100
LTE Session Value range: Indicates the LTE service offline rate.
Drop Rate 0 to 100 LTE Session Drop Rate = Session Drop
(unit: %) Counter/Session Setup Success Counter
x 100
LTEPBMDropRa Value range: Indicates the LTE PBM call drop rate.
te 0 to 100 LTEPBMDropRate = Number of call
(unit: %) drops for PBM services/Total number
of PBM tests x 100
LTE CSFB Call Value range: Indicates the voice signaling call drop
Dropped Rate 0 to 100 rate for LTE CSFB services.
(unit: %) LTE CSFB Call Dropped Rate =
Number of voice signaling call drops/
Total number of calls x 100
CSFB Call Drop Value range: Indicates the CSFB call drop rate.
Rate 0 to 100 CSFB Call Drop Rate = Number of
(unit: %) CSFBCallDrop events/(Number of
CSFBCallEstablished(MOC) events +
Number of CSFBCallEstablish-
ed(MTC) events) x 100
LTE SMS end- Value range: Indicates the E2E success rate of
and-end 0 to 100 receiving SMs on LTE networks.
Received Suc (unit: %) LTE SMS end-and-end Received Suc
Rate Rate = Number of received SMs/
Number of sent SMs x 100
Mobility Intra Frequency Value range: Indicates the handover attempt success
HO Attempt 0 to 100 rate.
Success Rate (unit: %) Intra Frequency HO Attempt Success
Rate = IntraFreqHOAttempt/
HOPrepareAttempt x 100
RRC Setup Time Unit: ms Indicates the average RRC setup delay.
Delay Avg Average RRC setup delay = Total RRC
setup delay/Number of successful RRC
setups
The RRC setup delay indicates the
interval between the RRCSetupReq
event and the RRCSetupSuc event.
LTE Call Setup Unit: ms Indicates the LTE call setup delay (CS
Delay(CS concurrent PS).
Concurrent PS) LTE Call Setup Delay(CS Concurrent
PS) = Time when an MTC hears the
ringback tone - Time when an MOC
initiates a call
LTE SMS Sent Unit: ms Indicates the LTE E2E SMs sent and
and Received received delay.
Delay LTE SMS Sent and Received Delay =
Message received time - Message sent
time
Radio Access Value range: Indicates the LTE radio access delay
Delay (>=5s) 0 to 100 distribution.
Rate (unit: %) Radio Access Delay (>=5s) Rate =
Number of times the radio access delay
is greater than or equal to 5s/Number of
successful radio access times x 100
VoLTE Call Drop Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE call
%) drop rate.
VoLTECallDropRate =
Number of VoLTE call drop
times/(Number of outgoing
VoLTE call answering times
+ Number of VoLTE
incoming call answering
times) x 100%
VoLTE Video Phone Setup Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of
Success Rate(MOC) %) outgoing VoLTE call setups.
VoLTEVideoPhoneSetu-
pSuccess Rate(MOC) =
Number of successful
VoLTE outgoing call setups/
(Number of successful
VoLTE outgoing call setups
+ Number of failed VoLTE
outgoing call setups) x
100%
VoLTE Video Phone Setup Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the success rate of
Success Rate(MTC) %) incoming VoLTE call setups.
VoLTEVideoPhoneSetu-
pSuccess Rate(MTC) =
Number of successful
VoLTE incoming call
setups/(Number of
successful VoLTE incoming
call setups + Number of
failed VoLTE incoming call
setups) x 100%
VoLTE IntraRAT Duration Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: VoLTE IntraRAT Duration
Proportion %) Proportion = VoLTE intra-
RAT call duration/Total
VoLTE MOC duration x
100%
VoLTE Video Phone Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE video
Duration Proportion %) call duration proportion.
VoLTE Video Phone
Duration Proportion =
VideoPhoneDuration (video
call duration)/
VideoPhoneTotalDuration
(total call duration) x 100%
LTE VoiceCall CSFB Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the CSFB call
Proportion(MOC) %) completion proportion
(MOC).
LTE VoiceCall CSFB
Proportion(MOC) = Number
of VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC)/(Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC) + Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC)) x 100%
LTE VoiceCall CSFB Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the CSFB call
Proportion(MTC) %) completion proportion
(MTC).
LTE VoiceCall CSFB
Proportion(MTC) = Number
of VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC)/(Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC) + Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC)) x 100%
VoLTE IntraRAT Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE intra-
Proportion(MOC) %) RAT call completion
proportion (MOC).
VoLTE IntraRAT
Proportion(MOC) = Number
of VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC)/(Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MOC) + Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MOC)) x 100%
VoLTE IntraRAT Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE intra-
Proportion(MTC) %) RAT call completion
proportion (MTC).
VoLTE IntraRAT
Proportion(MTC) = Number
of VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC)/(Number of
VoLTECallEstablish-
ed(MTC) + Number of
VoLTEtoCSFBCallEstab-
lished(MTC)) x 100%
VoLTE IP RoHC UL Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the uplink VoLTE
%) IP packet header
compression (ROHC) rate.
VoLTE IP RoHC DL Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the downlink
%) VoLTE IP packet header
compression (ROHC) rate.
IMS Register Success Rate Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the IMS
%) registration success rate.
IMS Register Success Rate
= Number of successful IMS
registration/(Number of
successful IMS registration
+ Number of IMS
registration failures) x 100%
VoLTE Call Drop Count Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the VoLTE
1km %) kilometer call drop rate.
VoLTE Call Drop Count
1km = Number of VoLTE
call drops/Distance (km)
VoLTE RTP High Lost Value range: 0 to 100 (unit: Indicates the Real-Time
Rate(QCI=1) %) Transport Protocol (RTP)
high packet loss rate.
VoLTE RTP High Lost
Rate(QCI=1) = Count of
RTP Lost Rate(QCI=1)
greater than 3%/Count of
RTP Lost Rate(QCI=1) x
100%
Access Success Rate Indicates the access success Random access success rate.
rate. Access Success Rate =
Number of random access
success times/Total number
of random access times
Packet Sent Delay Indicates the packet sent Packet Sent delay.
delay Packet Sent Delay =
ERRC_DATA_CNF(msg_id
=0 packet receive time -
L3_EMM_CONTROL_PL
ANE_SERVICE_REQ
packet receive time
FirstDataPacket Delay Indicates the first data First data packet delay.
packet delay FirstDataPacket Delay =
LL1_UL_DATA_REQ
packet receive time -
RRCConnectionSetCom-
plete packet receive time
PSS Sync Time Indicates the PSS sync delay PSS sync time.
PSS Sync Time =
DSP_PSS_SEARCH_CN
packet receive time -
DSP_PSS_SEARCH_REQ
packet receive time
SSS Sync Time Indicates the SSS sync delay SSS sync time.
SSS Sync Time =
DSP_SSS_SEARCH_CN
packet receive time -
DSP_SSS_SEARCH_REQ
packet receive time
PBCH Sync Time Indicates the PBCH sync PBCH sync time.
delay PBCH Sync Time =
DSP_NPBCH_CNF packet
receive time -
DSP_NPBCH_REQ packet
receive time
Packet Delivery Delay Indicates the packet delivery Packet delivery delay.
delay Packet Delivery Delay =
ERRC_DATA_CNF(msg_id
=0) packet receive time -
L3_EMM_CONTROL_PL
ANE_SERVICE_REQ
packet receive time
SIB1 Sync Time Indicates the SIB1 sync SIB1 sync time.
delay SIB1 Sync Time =
LL1_SIB1_DATA_IND
packet receive time -
LL1_MIB_DATA_IND
packet receive time
SIB2 Sync Time Indicates the SIB2 sync SIB2 sync time.
delay SIB2 Sync Time =
PDH_UL_DATA_STATUS_
IND packet receive time -
PDH_DATA_REQ packet
receive time
Packet Lost Rate Indicates the packet lost rate Packet lost rate.
Packet Lost Rate = (Number
of PDH_DATA_REQ -
Number of
PDH_UL_DATA_STATUS_
IND) / Number of
PDH_DATA_REQ
RLF Count Indicates the call radio link Call radio link fail rate..
fail rate. Service Drop Rate =
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= 4)/
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= n)
Service Drop Rate Indicates the call drop rate. Call drop rate.
Service Drop Rate =
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= 4)/
ERRC_REL_IND(rel_cause
= n)
Coverage TD-SCDMA Value range: 0 Indicates the coverage rate when the
Coverage to 100 (unit: %) RSCP is greater than or equal to -95
Rate(RSCP ≥ -95 dBm and the Ec/IO is greater than
dBm & Ec/IO ≥ or equal to -12 dB.
-12dB) TD-SCDMA Coverage Rate(RSCP
≥ -95 dBm & Ec/IO ≥ -12dB) =
Coverage distance/Total distance of
a drive test x 100
Mobility TD-SCDMA RRC Value range: 0 Indicates the RRC setup success
Success Rate to 100 (unit: %) rate.
TD-SCDMA RRC Success Rate =
Number of RRC setup success
events/(Number of RRC setup
success events + Number of RRC
setup failure events) x 100
Retainabili TD-SCDMA Call Value range: 0 Indicates the AMR call drop rate.
ty Drop Rate to 100 (unit: %) TD-SCDMA Call Drop Rate =
Number of call drop times/Total
number of calls x 100
TD-SCDMA Data Value range: 0 Indicates the data service drop rate
Service Drop to 100 (unit: %) since the RRC request is sent.
Rate(On RRC) TD-SCDMA Data Service Drop
Rate(On RRC) = Number of Data
Service Drop events/Number of
DataServiceReq events x 100
TD-SCDMA Data Value range: 0 Indicates the data service drop rate
Service Drop to 100 (unit: %) since the PDP activation success
Rate(On PDP) event occurs.
TD-SCDMA Data Service Drop
Rate(On PDP) = Number of Data
Service Drop events/Number of
PDP activation success events x 100
Delay Associate Time The value Indicates the duration from the
Delay must be less association attempt to the association
than 5 (unit: success. The calculation formula is as
s). follows: Association success time -
Association attempt time.
DHCP Req to IP The value Indicates the duration from the DHCP
Adr Assigned must be less IP address getting attempt time to the
Time Delay than 5 (unit: DHCP IP address getting time. The
second). calculation formula is as follows:
DHCP IP address getting time - DHCP
IP address getting attempt time.
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution request/(Failed
DNS host name resolution
request + Successful DNS
host name resolution
request) x 100.
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery.
HTTP Browsing IP-service HTTP Browsing IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event.
HTTP Browsing Display HTTP Browsing data Time from when the
Delay transmission time terminal initiates an HTTP
GET request to when the
terminal receives the last
data packet.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last data packet
- Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request.
HTTP Browsing Roundtrip HTTP Browsing round trip Time from when the
Total Time time (RTT) terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
receives a TCP SYN ACK
event.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
sends a TCP SYN event -
Time when the terminal
receives a TCP SYN ACK
event.
HTTP Browsing IP-Service HTTP Browsing IP service Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate access failure rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100.
HTTP Browsing Page HTTP Browsing page Time from when the
Response Delay response delay terminal initiates a TCP
SYN setup message to when
the terminal receives a
success response message
returned from the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Page response success time -
Page access attempt time.
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution requests/All DNS
host name resolution
requests x 100
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery
HTTP Download IP-service HTTP Download IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event
HTTP Download delay HTTP Download data Time from when the
transmission time terminal initiates an HTTP
GET request to when the
terminal receives the last
data packet
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last data packet
- Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP GET
request
HTTP Download IP-Service IP service access failure rate Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Rate of failures to resolve a
Failure Rate failure rate DNS host name to the host
address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Failed DNS host name
resolution requests/All DNS
host name resolution
requests x 100
DNS Host Name Resolution DNS host name resolution Time when a host name is
Time time resolved to the host address
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time of StandardQueryRes-
ponse - Time of
StandardQuery
HTTP Upload IP-service HTTP Upload IP service Time from when the
access time access time terminal sends a TCP SYN
event to when the terminal
initiates an HTTP POST
request
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
initiates an HTTP POST
request - Time when the
terminal sends a TCP SYN
event
HTTP Upload delay HTTP Upload data Delay from the page request
transmission time to the upload success when
the terminal initiates an
HTTP POST request to
when the terminal receives
the last data packet
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Time when the terminal
receives the last POST
response - Time when the
terminal initiates an HTTP
POST request
HTTP Upload IP-Service HTTP Upload IP service Users fail to set up a TCP/IP
Access Failure Rate access failure rate connection to the server.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of failed attempts to
set up IP connections to the
server/All attempts to set up
IP connections to the server
x 100
HTTP Upload Success Rate HTTP Upload success rate Rate of times that the
terminal initiates the web
page upload service
successfully to total
attempts
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times page
contents are successfully
downloaded/(Number of
times page contents are
successfully downloaded +
Number of times page
contents fail to be
downloaded) x 100
HTTP Streaming First Play HTTP video first play The buffer success rate of all
Success Rate success rate HTTP videos.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of HTTP video first
buffer successes/Number of
HTTP video first buffer
startups x 100.
HTTP Streaming First Average HTTP video first Average delay from when
Buffer Delay Avg buffer delay the on-demand video play
starts to when the first buffer
ends of all HTTP videos.
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(HTTP video first buffer
success time - HTTP video
access request time)/HTTP
video first buffer successes.
Email KPIs
This section describes the Email KPIs. You can refer to this section when performing the
email test, and then perform the related operations.
SMTP Email Upload Mean Average delay of SMTP Time from when the users
Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the SMTP
email is successfully sent -
Time when the SMTP email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent SMTP
emails
SMTP Email Upload Mean Average rate of sending Average rate of users
Data Rate SMTP emails sending an email
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Size of the uploaded email
file/Duration required for
uploading the email x 100.
POP3 Email Download POP3 email sending success Success rate of email
Success Ratio rate sending
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
Number of times the POP3
is sent successfully/(Number
of times the POP3 is sent
successfully + Number of
times the POP3 is sent
failed) x 100
POP3 Email Download Average delay of POP3 Time from when the users
Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the POP3 email
is successfully sent - Time
when the POP3 email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent POP3
emails
IMAP Email Download Average delay of IMAP Time from when the users
Mean Time email sending start to send an email to
when the users receive a
notification indicating a
sending success
The value is calculated
using the following formula:
(Time when the IMAP email
is successfully sent - Time
when the IMAP email
sending request is initiated)/
Number of sent IMAP
emails
CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined GSM CS report template. The template contains the
common CS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators of the template to
generate a new report template as required.
Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile information and the template information.
l Statistics information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, bands,
handovers, and SMSs.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about some common IEs, such as RxLev Sub,
RxQual Sub, BER Sub, PESQ P862.1, FER Sub, C/I Worst, MS Power Control Level,
and TA.
l Failure event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information of most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.
Statistical Information
l Statistical information about KPIs
Statistics on the 20 common KPIs by default. For details about the KPIs, see 21.3.2
Description of Predefined GSM KPIs. If the KPIs in the predefined template cannot
satisfy your needs, you can modify the template and select KPIs as required. For details
about how to customize KPIs, see 17.1 Customizing KPIs.
l Statistical information about call setup delays
Number of call setup delays recorded in a logfile in each time segment and its
percentage. By default, the predefined CS report template provides nine time segments:
[0,2), [2,4), [4,6), [6,8), [8,10), [10,12), [12,15), [15,20), and [20,+∞). The unit is
microsecond.
l Statistical information about bands
Number of CS services at each band (GSM 850 MHz, GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz,
or PCS 1900 MHz) and its percentage.
l Statistical information about handovers
KPI information related to handovers, including both inter-frequency handovers and
inter-band handovers.
l Statistical information about SMSs
Times for sending and receiving SMSs.
IE Statistical Information
The statistical information about the common IEs is collected. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information of the IE on the map.
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
In addition to the DT point information of failure events, the map also displays the DT point information of
RxLev Sub by default.
PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined PS report template. The template contains common PS
analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the template to
generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to generate a
new report template as required.
Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, MS name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l PS service statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on session events, attach events, PDP
activation tests, ping tests, FTP tests, WAP tests, and HTTP tests.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
statistical information on RxLev Full, bit error probability (BEP), and coding scheme.
l Failure event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.
l Attach events
l PDP activation tests
l Ping tests
l FTP tests
l WAP tests
l HTTP tests
IE Statistical Information
l Statistical information about frequency bands
Provides the number of PS services at each frequency band (GSM850, GSM900,
DCS1800, or PCS1900) and its percentage.
l Basic information about GPRS and EDGE
Provides the number of times users use data services on the GPRS and EDGE networks
and their usage. Provides also the coverage rate of the GPRS and EDGE networks.
l Statistical information about common events
Provides the statistics on cell reselection and route update.
l Statistical information about RxLev Full
Provides detailed statistics on RxLev Full and presents these statistics on maps, charts,
and tables.
l Statistical information about throughput
Provides statistics on the uplink and downlink throughput at the Application (APP) layer,
Radio Link Control (RLC) layer, and Logical Link Control (LLC) layer and presents
these statistics on maps and charts.
l Statistical information about BEP
Provides statistics on the average values and variation coefficients of BEP and presents
these statistics on charts.
l Statistical information about coding scheme
Provides the percentages of CS1 to CS4 and MCS 1 to MCS 9 used at the uplink and
downlink.
In addition to DT point information about failure events, the map also displays the DT point information
about RxLev Sub by default.
CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined WCDMA CS report template. The template contains
common CS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.
Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the basic information about the DT logfile and the template.
l Statistical Information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, call drops,
handovers, and UE pilot pollution rate.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, such as RSCP,
Ec/IO, BlER, Tx Power, and SC.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.
PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined WCDMA PS report template. The template contains
common PS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.
Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l PS service statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on session events, attach events, PDP
activation tests, ping tests, FTP tests, WAP tests, HTTP tests, and UE Pilot Pollution
Rate.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
SERV CELL, BLER, and SIR.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information, legend information, and statistical
information about common events on the map.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.
Event Information
This part provides the statistical information about common events in the DT logfile. The
information about each event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of failure events
Overview
The Scanner analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
his part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name, and start time and
end time of the DT logfile.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example, SC
For 1st Best In Active Set, RSCP For 1st Best In Active Set, Ec/Io For 1st Best In Active
Set.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of IEs, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of IEs.
Overview
The ATU analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, and start time and end time of
the DT logfile.
l Statistical Information
This part contains statistical information of KPIs.
l DT logfile information: including the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, ATU name
included in the DT logfile, and start time and end time of the DT logfile.
l Template information: indicating the template type of the report.
l DT track information.
Statistical Information
This part provides the detailed information about common services, including KPI names and
KPI values of the corresponding services.
UE Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined LTE UE report template. The template contains common
UE analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the template to
generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to generate a
new report template as required.
Overview
The UE analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
l Statistical information
This part contains the statistical information on attach events, ping tests, FTP tests, and
HTTP tests.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
Serving EARFCN, PCI, and SINR.
l Event information
This part contains the DT point information, legend information, and statistical
information about common events on the map.
Statistical Information
This part provides the detailed statistical information about common services, including KPI
names and KPI values of the corresponding services. Statistical information about the
following common indicators of services is collected:
l Attch Success Rate
l Ping Round Trip Time Avg
l FTP Upload Success Rate
l HTTP Download Throughput
l RRC Setup Success Rate
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs and presents the information
on maps and in charts. Statistical information about the following IEs is collected:
l Serving EARFCN
l Serving PCI
l Serving RSRP
l Serving RSRQ
l Serving SINR anttena 0
l Serving SINR anttena 1
l PUSCH Power
l PUCCH Power
l AGC Power
l SRS Power
l App Throughput UL
l App Throughput DL
Event Information
This part provides the statistical information about common events in the DT logfile. The
information about each event comprises the following parts:
l DT point information about the event on the map
l Event and legend information involved in the map
l Statistical table on the count of failure events
Overview
The Scanner analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
his part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, Scanner name, and start time and
end time of the DT logfile.
l IE statistical information
This part contains the detailed information about certain common IEs, for example,
EARFCN For 1st Best In ServiceCell, PCI For 1st Best In ServiceCell, RSRP For 1st
Best In ServiceCell.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs and presents the information
on maps and in charts. Statistical information about the following IEs is collected:
l EARFCN For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l PCI For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSRP For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSRQ For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l RSSI For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l SIR For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l SINR For 1st Best In ServiceCell
l Mutil Path Dalay For 1st Best In ServiceCell
CS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined TD-SCDMA CS report template. The template contains
the common CS analysis counters and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.
Overview
The CS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the basic information about the DT logfile and the template.
l Statistical Information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, call setup delays, call drops,
handovers, and UE pilot pollution rate.
l IE Statistical Information
This part contains detailed information about common IEs, including RSCP, ISCP,
BLER, Tx Power, and SC.
l Event Information
This part contains the point information and legend information about most failure
events on the map and the failure event statistical information.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of the IE.
PS Analysis Report
The Assistant provides a predefined TD-SCDMA PS report template. The template contains
common PS analysis indicators and can satisfy your basic needs. You can directly use the
template to generate a report. Alternatively, you can modify the indicators in the template to
generate a new report template as required.
Overview
The PS analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic Report Information
This part contains the DT logfile name, DT logfile size, UE name, and start time and end
time of the DT logfile.
IE Statistical Information
This part provides the statistical information about common IEs. The statistical information
about each IE comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the IE on the map
l Legend information involved in the map.
l Statistical charts of the IE, which can be displayed in three views: CDF view, PDF view,
and CDF & PDF view.
l Statistical table of the IE.
Event Information
This part provides the common event information in the logfile. The information about each
event comprises the following parts:
l Point information about the event on the map
Overview
The SSV report can be generated as Word or Excel files. Word files includ GSM SSV, LTE
SSV, WCDMA SSV and LTE VoLTE SSV, Excel files includ CDMA SSV, GSM SSV, LTE
SSV, LTE VoLTE SSV, TD-SCDMA SSV and WCDMA SSV.
The SSV analysis report consists of the cover and body. The body comprises the following
parts:
l Basic report information
This part contains the site information, the cell information and the test Environment and
Kits information.
l Statistics information
This part contains the statistical information about the KPIs, Events, and IEs.
Statistical Information
l Statistical information about KPIs
The statistical information about the common KPIs is collected.
l Statistical information about Events
The statistical information about the common Events is collected.
l Statistical information about IEs
The statistical information about the common IEs is collected.
Overview
Cross table predefined reports are generated as .xls files that contain multiple worksheets
named CQI-Throughput Carrier0, CQI-Modulation Carrier0, ECIO-Throughput Carrier0,
Basic Information
l CQI-Throughput Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Modulation Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Throughput Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Modulation Carrier0 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Throughput Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l CQI-Modulation Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationship between the CQI values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Throughput Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
throughput at the MAC layer and displays the PDF percentage and CDF percentage.
l ECIO-Modulation Carrier1 worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between the Ec/Io values of the serving cell and the
modulation modes and displays the PDF percentage and the CDF percentage.
No. Description
(2) Displays the cross relationships between the CQI values of the serving cell
and the modulation modes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM in area
(1) in a bar-line combination chart. The scale interval of the right axis is
10%.
(3) Displays the cross relationships between the CQI of the serving cell and
the modulation modes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM in area (1) in
bar charts and line charts. The scale interval of the right axis is 5%.
Parameter Description
PDF(%) Indicates the percentage of DT points that uses a specific modulation mode
corresponding to a certain CQI value of the serving cell to all DT points.
Overview
MOS reports are generated as .xls files that contain three worksheets. The three worksheets
are used to present the relationship between MOS and HAMR, relationship between MOS and
FAMR, and relationship between MOS and coding schemes.
Basic Information
l MOS-HAMR worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between AMR half-rate (HAMR) and MOS PESQ value
ranges.
No. Description
(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.
(3) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a line chart.
Parameter Description
l MOS-FAMR worksheet
Displays the cross relationships between AMR full-rate (FAMR) and MOS PESQ value
ranges.
No. Description
No. Description
(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.
(3) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a line chart.
Parameter Description
(2) Displays the data distribution statistics in area (1) in a bar chart.
(3) Displays the PDF percentage change and CDF percentage change of
different coding schemes within different MOS PESQ value ranges
in area (1) in a line chart.
Parameter Description
Exit Alt+F+X
Pausing Alt+A+S
BLER Alt+V+D+W+B
Throughput Alt+V+D+T+T
BLER Alt+V+D+T+B
UE State Alt+V+D+T+U
Throughput Alt+V+D+L+T
BLER Alt+V+D+L+B
MIMO Alt+V+D+L+M
Map Alt+V+D+P+M
L3 Message Alt+V+D+M+L
Event Alt+V+D+M+E
Save Alt+V+S
Save As Alt+V+A
Delete Alt+V+E
Switch Alt+V+T
Benchmark Alt+R+B
SSV Alt+R+S
Import Alt+T+I
Full Alt+T+I+F
Custom Alt+T+I+C
Export Alt+T+E
Full Alt+T+E+F
Custom Alt+T+E+C
URL
URLs used by the software are as follows:
l http://www.huawei.com
l http://earth.google.com/kml/2.0
l http://maps.google.com